Sun Ray Software Man Page Reference Guide (Oracle Linux)

Version 5.2

Published: December 2011

Part number: E26956-01

Copyright © 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.

Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.

This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.

Abstract

AThis guide provides the output for all the man pages delivered with the Sun Ray Software release for the Oracle Linux operating system.

Sun Ray Server Software Man Pages

man1

man3

man4

man5

man8

Sun Ray Windows Connector Man Pages

man1

man8

Sun Ray Kiosk Man Pages

man1

man5

man8

Sun Ray Server Software Man Pages

utaction.1



Sun Ray User Commands                                 utaction(1)



NAME
     utaction - Sun Ray DTU connect/disconnect/exit action

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utaction  [ -c ccmd ] [ -d dcmd ] [ -x  xcmd
     ] [ -e  ]  [ -D display ]  [ -i ] [ -t sec ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utaction program provides a way to execute commands when
     a  Sun   Ray  DTU   session  is connected or disconnected or
     when the session terminates. The ccmd is invoked using sh(1)
     whenever  the  session  is  connected  to a DTU, the dcmd is
     invoked using sh(1) whenever  the  session  is  disconnected
     from a DTU, and the xcmd is invoked using sh(1) whenever the
     session exits. Normally, action is not taken on the  initial
     state of the session (when utaction is first run) unless the
     -i option is used.

     Note:  In  earlier  releases,  this   command   resided   in
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utaction  ;  now,  however,  it  resides  in
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utaction .

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -c ccmd
           Run this command when the current session is connected
           to a DTU.

     -d dcmd
           Run this command when the current session  is  discon-
           nected from a DTU.

     -x xcmd
           Run this command when the current session exits. utac-
           tion will always exit after running this command.

     -D display
           This option will set the X display variable that is to
           be used in determining the Sun Ray DTU session. Other-
           wise the DISPLAY environment variable is used.

     -e    This option causes utaction to exit after encountering
           a command.

     -i    Run the connect  or  disconnect  command  immediately,
           whichever  is  appropriate.  The  session exit command
           will never be run immediately, it  will  only  be  run
           when the session exits.

     -t sec
           This option specifies a time-delay in seconds for  the



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Commands                                 utaction(1)



           actions.  In  that  case, the ccmd or dcmd will not be
           invoked unless the session remains in the connected or
           disconnected  state,  respectively,  for  at least sec
           seconds. This option does not  apply  to  the  session
           exit action.


EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command invokes the CDE screen lock whenever
     the session is disconnected

     % utaction -d '/usr/dt/bin/dtaction LockDisplay' &

     Example 2: This command shuts down the system  whenever  the
     session exits

     % utaction -x '/usr/sbin/halt' &

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


NOTES
     The ccmd, dcmd  and xcmd  are  each  only  one  argument  to
     utaction. Quotes should be used if a command contains multi-
     ple words.























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utaudio.1



Sun Ray User Command                                   utaudio(1)



NAME
     utaudio - Sun Ray audio services connection utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utaudio

  csh
     setenv AUDIODEV `utaudio`

  ksh
     export AUDIODEV=`utaudio`

  sh
     AUDIODEV=`utaudio`;export AUDIODEV

DESCRIPTION
     utaudio enables standard Solaris audio  services  using  the
     utadem(7D) audio device emulator driver. After connecting to
     a Sun Ray session, utadem(7D) creates a new audio device for
     which  utaudio  creates  device files in the /tmp/SUNWut/dev
     directory. utaudio then echoes the root device name to stan-
     dard  output,  setting  the  AUDIODEV  environment variable.
     Standard audio applications can  then  open  the  new  audio
     pseudo-device and perform audio play and record operations.

OPTIONS
     There are no options for utaudio.

API
     Applications that use the /dev/audio interface may open  the
     device  indicated  by  the AUDIODEV environment variable and
     use the AUDIO_GETDEV ioctl to determine which  audio  device
     is  being  used.   The  utaudio  driver  returns  the string
     "SUNW,CS4231" in the name field of the  audio_device  struc-
     ture  to  indicate compatibility with other Ultra platforms.
     The version field contains "a" and the config field contains
     "pseudo."

     The AUDIO_SETINFO ioctl controls device configuration param-
     eters.   When an application modifies the record.buffer_size
     field using the AUDIO_SETINFO ioctl, the  daemon  will  con-
     strain it to be non-zero and up to a maximum of 8180 bytes.

     Audio Data Formats
           The utaudio daemon supports u-law and A-law with 8-bit
           precision or 16-bit linear PCM at any sample rate from
           8000 Hz to 48 kHz for one or two channels. The Sun Ray
           standard  sampling  rate  is 48 kHz as this yields the
           best quality. The input and output  data  formats  for
           playing and recording do not have to match. Some input
           devices do not  provide  2-channel  capture,  but  two
           channels will be reproduced by duplication in the case



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Command                                   utaudio(1)



           where two channels are requested and the  device  sup-
           ports only one.

      Audio Ports
           The record.avail_ports and play.avail_ports fields  of
           the  audio_info  structure  report the available input
           and output ports for the currently connected  Sun  Ray
           DTU.  Only AUDIO_MICROPHONE and AUDIO_LINE_IN are sup-
           ported and most devices will have both inputs. The Sun
           Ray  audio  model  supports individual volume controls
           for the two, so it is possible that the volume setting
           will change with input.

           For output, AUDIO_LINE_OUT is always selected and does
           not    have    variable    gain.   AUDIO_SPEAKER   and
           AUDIO_HEADPHONE are supported and they share  a  level
           control.  In  general,  comfortable  settings  for the
           speaker will also be comfortable  for  headphone  use.
           Either or both outputs can be selected simultaneously.
           The Sun Ray specification supports a third,  automatic
           switching  mode  that  is accessed by deselecting both
           speaker and headphone or by selecting only  line  out.
           The  utsettings(1) command may also be used to control
           the device's outputs. In automatic mode, the  settings
           track the physical connection of the headphone.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /tmp/SUNWut/dev/utaudio/n


     Numbered audio data pseudo-device file nodes.

        o  /tmp/SUNWut/dev/utaudio/nctl


     Matching numbered control pseudo-device file nodes.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     utaudio requires the DISPLAY environment variable contain an
     X11(7) display for which the user's session has access. This
     is set-up automatically in the Sun Ray environment.

     An alternate driver emulator or different unit number can be
     specified in the UT_ADEM environment variable.

     The results of utaudio should  be  placed  in  the  AUDIODEV
     environment variable.

EXIT STATUS




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray User Command                                   utaudio(1)



     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Normal completion -- daemon back grounded

     1     Either the X11 server, or the  session  could  not  be
           contacted,  or  there  was  a problem creating the new
           pseudo audio device.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utsettings(1), X11(7), utadem(7D),  audio(7I),  steamio(7I),
     ioctl(2), priocntl(2), attributes(5), environ(5)

NOTES
     The audio(7I) interface  does  not  have  an  interface  for
     dynamically  changing  audio devices such as that offered by
     the Sun Ray software. It is not possible to track the  move-
     ment  of  sessions  or  changes in audio hardware using this
     device interface. The utaudio  daemon  makes  a  best-effort
     attempt  to  report changes in device control ability and to
     make the device appear as  flexible  as  possible,  matching
     that ability to the actual Sun Ray hardware being used.

     If a session is disconnected, audio output continues  as  if
     there was an actual hardware connection, even though no sam-
     ples are actually being transmitted or  played.  Conversely,
     audio input stops when there is no connected device.



















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utdetach.1



Sun Ray User Commands                                 utdetach(1)



NAME
     utdetach - Detach the current session from the Sun Ray DTU.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdetach

DESCRIPTION
     The utdetach command disconnects the  current  session  from
     its  respective  Sun  Ray DTU. The session is not destroyed,
     but rather put into a disconnected state. The session can be
     accessed  if the same user token is presented to the Sun Ray
     server.

     This command is primarily executed by users of the non-smart
     card  mobility  feature  so  as to disconnect their "mobile"
     sessions.

     The Sun Ray server starts an instance of utslaunch (1M)  for
     each  session  whenever  a  user logs into a Sun Ray DTU via
     dtlogin. This makes the utdetach command available to  users
     as a hotkey sequence. The default hotkey sequence is Shift +
     Pause and can  be  configured  in  the  utslaunch.properties
     file.

OPTIONS
     There are no options for utdetach.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command disconnects the current session from
     the DTU the user is currently using.

     % utdetach

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_defaults.properties


     site-wide defaults

        o  ~/.utslaunch.properties


     user's defaults

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_mandatory.properties


     site-wide mandatory defaults





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Commands                                 utdetach(1)



EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Types       |       Attribute Values      |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    | Stability Level             | Evolving                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utslaunch(1M), utslaunch.properties(4)



































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utdiskadm.1



Sun Ray User Commands                                utdiskadm(1)



NAME
     utdiskadm - Sun Ray Mass Storage device management utility

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -c device_name

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -e device_name

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -h

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -l [-a]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -m partition_name [-p mount_path]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -r device_name

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -s [-a]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utdiskadm -u mount_path

DESCRIPTION
     The utdiskadm command allows the user to perform administra-
     tion  tasks on mass storage devices connected to the Sun Ray
     DTU with which the current login session is associated. This
     command does not work on devices belonging to any other user
     except for some options available only  to  root.   It  also
     cannot  be used on devices connected directly to the Sun Ray
     server.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

               -c device_name

               Check device for existence of media

               -e device_name

               Eject media from devices with removable media

               -h

               Show usage information

               -l

               List all storage devices of  current  session  and
               their  mount  points.  This  option  will show the
               device_name, partition_name and mount_path  for  a
               device.

               -l -a



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Commands                                utdiskadm(1)



               List all storage devices of on system. This option
               combination can be used by root only

               -m partition_name

               Mount partition partition_name  on  default  mount
               point in $DTDEVROOT/mnt.

               -m partition_name -p mount_path

               Mount  partition   partition_name   on   directory
               mount_path

               -r device_name

               Prepare device device_name for removal by unmount-
               ing all its partitions

               -s

               List stale mount points for which physical devices
               do not exist

               -s -a

               List stale mount points on entire system All stale
               mount  points on the Sun Ray server are displayed.
               Only root is allowed to use this option.

                -u mount_path

               Unmount mount_path

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit codes are returned:

               0

               The operation was successful

               1

               The  operation  was   unsuccessful

FILES
     The following files are used:

               $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk

               The directory  containing  links  to  block   dev-
               ice names  for  each partition on the device.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray User Commands                                utdiskadm(1)



ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray appliance associated with a user's session.

     DTDEVROOT points to a temporary  directory  associated  with
     the user's session. The directory's lifetime is equal to the
     lifetime of the login session. It is removed, along with its
     contents, when the user logs out.

SEE ALSO
      utmountd(8), utstoraged(8), utdisk(4)












































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



uteject.1



Sun Ray User Command                                   uteject(1)



NAME
     uteject - Sun Ray Mass Storage media eject utility

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/uteject device_name

DESCRIPTION
     The uteject command has the same functionality as  utdiskadm
     -e.  It ejects media from removable media devices associated
     with the user's current Sun Ray session. If a filesystem  is
     mounted  on  the  device,  the  eject  operation attempts to
     unmount it first.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

               device_name

               Eject media from device_name


EXIT STATUS
     The following exit codes are returned:

               0

               The operation was successful

               1

               The  operation  was   unsuccessful

FILES
     The following files are used:

               $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk

               The directory  containing  links  to  block   dev-
               ice names  for  each partition on the device.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray DTU associated with a user's session.

SEE ALSO
     utdiskadm(8),    utmount(8),    utumount(8),    utmountd(8),
     utstoraged(8), utdisk(4)








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utmount.1



Sun Ray User Commands                                  utmount(1)



NAME
     utmount - Sun Ray Mass Storage media mount utility

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utmount -m partition_name[-p  mount_path]

DESCRIPTION
     The utmount command has the same functionality as  utdiskadm
     -m.   It  is  used  to  mount  partition_name  on either the
     default mount point in $DTDEVROOT/mnt, or on a user supplied
     mount point mount_path.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

               -m partition name

               Mount partition partition_name  on  default  mount
               point in $DTDEVROOT/mnt.

               -m partition_name -p mount_path

               Mount  partition   partition_name   on   directory
               mount_path


EXIT STATUS
     The following exit codes are returned:

               0

               The operation was successful

               1

               The  operation  was   unsuccessful

FILES
     The following files are used:

     Table 1


          $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk  The  directory   containing   links
                              to   block  device names  for  each
                              partition on the device.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray DTU associated with a user's session.





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Commands                                  utmount(1)



     DTDEVROOT points to a temporary  directory  associated  with
     the user's session. The directory's lifetime is equal to the
     lifetime of the login session. It is removed, along with its
     contents, when the user logs out.

SEE ALSO
     utdiskadm(8),    uteject(8),    utumount(8),    utmountd(8),
     utstoraged(8), utdisk(4)















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utselect.1



Sun Ray User Command                                  utselect(1)



NAME
     utselect - Sun Ray failover group server selection tool.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utselect  [ -L ]  [ -R ]  [ -S ]  [ -X ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utselect command is a graphical user interface (GUI)  to
     the  utswitch command. It allows the user to select manually
     to which Sun Ray server or session the Sun  Ray  DTU  is  to
     connect. The sessions in the GUI are sorted in order of most
     current. The second item  in  the  list  is  highlighted  by
     default  to  allow  easy  switching between two servers. The
     Refresh button executes the utswitch -l command and  updates
     the information displayed in the GUI. The OK button executes
     a utswitch -h command to the server highlighted.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -L    Configures utselect to run in "login" mode before  the
           log in screen is displayed. Where:

              o  If only one server  is  available,  the  command
                 exits.

              o  The current server is set as the default.

              o  Selecting the current server causes the  command
                 to exit

              o  The locale is determined in a manner similar  to
                 CDE

              o  The screen is centered in the display

     -R    Remote server selection is enabled.  This  enables  an
           entry  field  where  a  networked  server  name can be
           entered.

     -S    Remote server selection is disabled.

     -X    Exit after making a selection from the list.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command enables users to  select  which  Sun
     Ray server or session to connect. The GUI exits after selec-
     tion

     % /opt/SUNWut/bin/utselect -X





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Command                                  utselect(1)



FILES
     Two properties in the auth.props(4)file impact the operation
     of utselect:


          selectAtLogin=true  This setting will cause utselect to
                              run  before dtlogin and allow users
                              to start their session on a partic-
                              ular  machine. The default value is
                              "false"

          remoteSelect=true   This setting will cause utselect to
                              behave  as  if  the  -R option were
                              specified. This will allow users to
                              input  the name of a server outside
                              of the default HA group, if the Sun
                              Ray DTU can connect to it (i.e. the
                              Sun  Ray  can  be  routed  to   the
                              server,  such  as  in a LAN deploy-
                              ment). The default value is false.


ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |          Attribute Type          |     Attribute Value    |
    | Availability                     |  SUNWuto               |
    |__________________________________|________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utswitch(1), attributes(5), auth.props(4)





















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utset.1



User Commands                                            utset(1)



NAME
     utset - view or change the Sun Ray DTU device settings.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utset [-d  arg[,...]  [-f]]  [-i  arg[,...]]
     [-o arg[,...]]  [-v arg[,...]]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utset -l

DESCRIPTION
     The utset command reports or modifies Sun  Ray  device  set-
     tings.   utset  executed  with no options prints the current
     status of all device settings to the standard output stream.
     utset  executed  with  the -d, -i, -o or -v options modifies
     the values of the specified settings.  utset  executed  with
     the  -l  option  prints  a list of predefined display timing
     names to the standard output stream.

     Sun Ray device settings are grouped  into  four  categories:
     Display,  Audio  Input,  Audio Output, and Video Input.  The
     setting to be modified is  selected  by  an  option  letter,
     which identifies the category, and an argument consisting of
     a list of individual parameter settings within that category
     and  the  values  that are desired for each of those parame-
     ters.   The  argument  is  a   comma   separated   list   of
     'name=value'  pairs, where name specifies a device parameter
     and value specifies the desired value of that parameter.

     Parameters reported as read only by utset may not  be  modi-
     fied.   Read-only status usually reflects some limitation of
     a particular model of DTU.  For instance, the  Sun  Ray  150
     supports  only  one display timing and therefore reports its
     display timing setting as a read-only parameter.

     The utsettings(1) command provides equivalent device parame-
     ter reporting and modification capabilities in a GUI format.

     The xset(1) command provides control over device  parameters
     such  as  mouse acceleration which are reported by utset but
     may not be modified by utset.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -d arg[,...] [-f]
           Set the Display timing:

           r[vonum]=timing
                     Display timing:  vonum is the number of  the
                     monitor  video  output  whose timing will be
                     modified.   The  DTU's  first  (and  perhaps
                     only)  monitor  video  output  is  number 1.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






User Commands                                            utset(1)



                     Additional outputs, if present, are  identi-
                     fied  by  successively  higher  numbers.  If
                     vonum is omitted then  output  number  1  is
                     assumed.   timing  is  the name of a timing.
                     The -l option gives the  list  of  available
                     timings.   Timing  names  are usually of the
                     form WxH@R where  W  is  the  resulting  on-
                     screen width (in pixels), H is the resulting
                     on-screen height (in pixels) and  R  is  the
                     resulting     refresh    rate    (in    Hz).
                     utresdef(1m) provides additional information
                     on monitor timings.

           If -f is not given then after the new  timing  is  put
           into  effect the user is asked to confirm that the new
           Resolution/Refresh Rate is acceptable.  If no  confir-
           mation   is   provided   within   a  certain  interval
           (currently 15 seconds) then the timing is returned  to
           its previous setting.

     -i arg[,...]
           Set the Audio Input settings:

           s={m|l}   Input Select: microphone, line.

           g=<0:75>  Microphone Gain: a range of 0 to 75.

           l=<0:15>  Line In Gain Left: a range of 0 to 15.

           r=<0:15>  Line In Gain Right: a range of 0 to 15.

           v=<0:64>  Volume: a range of 0 to 64.

     -l    Show the list of predefined display timing names.

     -o arg[,...]
           Set the Audio Output settings:

           s={a|h|s|hs}
                     Output  Select:  auto,  headphone,  speaker,
                     headphone and speaker.

           v=<0:31>  Volume: a range of 0 to 31.

           b=<-32:32>
                     Balance: a range of -32 to +32.

           m={on|off}
                     Mute: on, off (also: 1, 0 respectively).

           e={on|off}
                     Stereo  Enhance:  on,  off   (also:   1,   0



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






User Commands                                            utset(1)



                     respectively).

           T=<-6:6>  Treble: a range of -6 to +6.

           B=<-6:6>  Bass: a range of -6 to +6.

     -v arg[,...]
           Set the Video Input settings:

           b=<0:255> Brightness: a range of 0 to 255.

           c=<0:63>  Contrast: a range of 0 to 63.

           C=<0:127> Color: a range of 0 to 127.

           t=<0:255> Tint: a range of 0 to 255.

           f=<0:3>   Filter: a range of 0 to 3.

           T={on|off}
                     Color Trap: on,  off  (also:  1,  0  respec-
                     tively).

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command displays the current device settings
     for the Sun Ray DTU to which your session is attached:

          % utset
          Version: SunRayP3-3.1_10,REV=2005.03.30.15.44 (read only)
          Audio Input Mic Gain: 58
          Audio Input Line In Gain L: 0
          Audio Input Line In Gain R: 0
          Audio Input Select: Microphone
          Audio Input Monitor Volume: 0
          Audio Output Volume: 15
          Audio Output Balance: 0
          Audio Output Treble: 0
          Audio Output Bass: 0
          Audio Output Select: Auto
          Audio Output Headphone Detected: no
          Audio Output Mute: off
          Audio Output Stereo Enhance: off
          Mouse Threshold: 4
          Mouse Acceleration: 2.0
          Display Timing 1: 1024x768@60 (read only)
          Display Blanking: off
          Video Brightness: 128
          Video Contrast: 7
          Video Color: 46
          Video Tint: 128
          Video Filter: 3
          Video Color Trap: on



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






User Commands                                            utset(1)



     This session happens to be attached to a Sun Ray 150,  which
     has  only  one  (internal)  monitor video output whose whose
     display timing is fixed  and  is  therefore  reported  as  a
     read-only parameter.

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utresdef(1m), utsettings(1), xset(1)































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utsettings.1



Sun Ray User Command                                utsettings(1)



NAME
     utsettings - View or change the Sun Ray DTU settings.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utsettings

DESCRIPTION
     The utsettings command opens a Sun Ray Settings  dialog  box
     that  allows  the  user  to  view  or change audio and video
     interface settings for the Sun Ray DTU.

     The utsettings application is sensitive to session  hotdesk-
     ing.   As  the  user moves a session from one Sun Ray DTU to
     another, the utsettings application refreshes itself to show
     the current DTU's configuration.

     Modifications  made  through  utsettings  affect  only   the
     session's  current  DTU.  Hotdesking to another DTU does not
     cause the previous DTU's settings to be applied to  the  new
     DTU.

     If the DTU's monitor timing is modified by utsettings  in  a
     session  that  is associated with a personal mobile token (a
     smart card or an NSCM credential), then utsettings offers to
     make the selected timing permanent. If the user accepts that
     offer, then the timing is retained and reused on that user's
     subsequent  personal  mobile token sessions on the same DTU.
     For shared session token types, such as  pseudo,  users  are
     not  allowed  to  establish  long-term  resolution  settings
     because their choice might interfere with other people's use
     of the DTU.

     By default,  the  Sun  Ray  server  starts  an  instance  of
     utslaunch(8) for each session created by the user logging in
     via dtlogin. This enables the Sun Ray Settings dialog box to
     be  available  at  the press of a hotkey or key combination.
     Subsequent presses toggle the dialog box on  and  off.   See
     the  utslaunch(8)  man page for guidance on how to configure
     the key combination that  is  used  to  launch  and  dismiss
     utsettings.

OPTIONS
     No command-line options are supported.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command displays the settings  for  the  Sun
     Ray DTU that is currently presenting your session:

     % utsettings

EXIT STATUS




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Command                                utsettings(1)



     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Failure

SEE ALSO
     utslaunch(8), utslaunch.properties(5), utset(1)















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utswitch.1



Sun Ray User Command                                  utswitch(1)



NAME
     utswitch - Sun Ray  server  selection  and  session  listing
     utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utswitch   { -l | -t  | -h hostname }  [  -k
     token ]  [ -p port ] [ -r ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utswitch command allows switching a Sun  Ray  DTU  among
     Sun  Ray  servers  in a failover group. It can also list the
     existing sessions for the current token.   One of  the  fol-
     lowing  option  flags  must be specified: -l, -t, or -h. The
     utselect(1) command implements a GUI-based interface to this
     command.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -h hostname
           Force an explicit switch to the server with hostname.

     -k token
           Specify the token ID token to be  used  in  collecting
           session  information  from the servers in the failover
           group. The token normally used is the one connected to
           the current session.

     -l    List the servers accessible from the current  Sun  Ray
           DTU  for  the current token and show any existing ses-
           sions on those  servers.  This  output  is  considered
           ``volatile''  and  may  change  by the addition of new
           columns.

              o  The first field of  the  output  is  the  server
                 name.

              o  The second field is the X display number for  an
                 active  user  session. If no active user session
                 exists, then -1 is printed or -2 is  printed  if
                 the login screen is being displayed.

              o  The third field is the last connection  time  to
                 an  existing  session,  as a time value from the
                 time(2) system call. If there is no session, the
                 third field indicates status from the host as:

                      -1   Server is up, but there is no session.

                      -2   No response received from the server.

                      -3   No  path  from  the  Sun  Ray  to  the



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Command                                  utswitch(1)



                 server.

              o  The fourth field is 1 if the server  is  offline
                 and 0 otherwise.

              o  The fifth field is an alternative  to  the  last
                 connection  time  to  an  existing  session that
                 takes  care  of  clock  skew  between   servers.
                 Instead  of  the  absolute time of access, it is
                 the time since the last  access.   If  not  sup-
                 ported, or there is no session, the value is -1.

              o  The sixth field is optional and  if  present  is
                 the  IP  address of the interface that should be
                 used to connect the current session's Sun Ray to
                 the server.

     -p port
           Sets the port number of the Authentication Manager  on
           the  Sun  Ray  server  to port, instead of the default
           7009.

     -r    Forces a remote redirection  outside  of  the  current
           failover  group  to  search  for  an  existing session
           within an external failover group. If  no  session  is
           available,  load  balancing is performed. Without this
           option, the Sun Ray DTU is  bound  explicitly  to  the
           target  Sun  Ray server, rather than to an appropriate
           server within the target failover group.  This  option
           may only be used with the -h option

     -t    Switch to the server whose session has the latest con-
           nection  time  among  the  existing  sessions  for the
           current token.  Normally  this  would  switch  to  the
           current  session,  so  it has limited usefulness. How-
           ever, it is useful in the case of logging  out  of  an
           existing  X  session and back to the login screen. The
           connection time of a logged out session is biased back
           in  time  so  that the session will not be selected if
           there is an existing logged-in X  session  on  another
           server.  From  a  CDE  login screen, it is possible to
           force a call to utswitch -t by selecting  Reset  Login
           Screen  from  the  Options menu. This allows switching
           back to a logged-in  session  from  the  login  screen
           without having to log in.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /var/opt/SUNWut/displays/*





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray User Command                                  utswitch(1)



     X display files

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utselect(1), attributes(5)









































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utumount.1



Sun Ray User Commands                                 utumount(1)



NAME
     utumount - Sun Ray Mass Storage unmount utility

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utumount -u mount_path

DESCRIPTION
     The utumount command has the same functionality as utdiskadm
     -u.   It attempts to unmount the filesystem on mount_path if
     the related device is a Sun Ray storage device belonging  to
     the user.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

                -u mount_path

               Unmount mount_path

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit codes are returned:

     0     Success.

     1     Failure.

FILES
     The following files are used:

     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk  The  directory   containing   links   to
                         block  device names  for  each partition
                         on the device.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray DTU associated with a user's session.

SEE ALSO
     utdiskadm(8),    uteject(8),    utmount(8),     utmountd(8),
     utstoraged(8), utdisk(4)















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utxconfig.1



Sun Ray User Command                                 utxconfig(1)



NAME
     utxconfig - Sun Ray DTU X server configuration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig   [ -a|-A ] [ -d display  ]  [  -k
     xkb-value   ]  [ -l ] [ -m multihead ] [ -n xrender-value  ]
     [ -p pcolor ] [ -r res ]  [ -R geom ] [ -S screen-order ]  [
     -t token ] [ -v ] [ -x xinerama ] [ -b Xserver ] [ -q quick-
     Abort ]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig   -e  [ -d display ] [ -t token ]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig   [ -o ]  [ -f file ]

     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig   [ -i ]  [ -f file ]

DESCRIPTION
     utxconfig displays and configures X  server  parameters  for
     Sun  Ray  sessions.   Changes  to the X server settings made
     through utxconfig are not applied until a new X server  pro-
     cess is launched, as happens after logging out and then log-
     ging back in again.

     utxconfig can also specify the particular X server implemen-
     tation  to  be launched for each Sun Ray session. Currently,
     there is only one X server choice on Linux,  the  Xorg-based
     Xnewt X server.  If the configured preferred X server is not
     installed on the Sun Ray server, one of the other  available
     X server implementations will be launched.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    Allows the setting or listing of the  default  values.
           These  values  will override internal program defaults
           for settings that are not  explicitly  configured  for
           the  individual user.  Only a suitably privileged user
           may change the default settings.

     -A    Allows the setting or listing of the mandatory values.
           Settings  configured with the mandatory flag will take
           precedence over all user configured and system default
           settings  and  will  be enforced when listing the set-
           tings with the -l option.  Only  a suitably privileged
           user may change the mandatory settings.

     -b Xserver
           Establish the X server preference  for  the  specified
           token.    Possible   Xserver  values  are  "Xnewt"  or
           "reset".  If not defined, it will  fall  back  to  the
           default  utxconfig  preference  (i.e.  the  preference
           added with the -a option).  If the  default  utxconfig



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Command                                 utxconfig(1)



           preference is also not defined, then it will fall back
           to the program default which is  Xnewt.   Specify  the
           value  "reset"  if  you  want  to reset the preference
           value back to the default.

     -d display
           Sets the X display variable used to determine the  Sun
           Ray  DTU  session.  Otherwise, the DISPLAY environment
           variable is used. Users  must  have  access  to  an  X
           server  attached to their session before they can read
           or change the settings for that session.

     -e    Erases all specific settings for the session. All set-
           tings return to their default values.

     -f file
           Specifies a file to be used in conjunction with -o  or
           -i.

     -i    Populates the system settings database from a  collec-
           tion  of  comma-delimited text records such as the one
           produced by -o. Input is taken from the standard input
           unless  -f  is  specified.  Only a suitably privileged
           user may use this option.

     -k xkb-value
           Enable or disable the XKB extension. To enable use  of
           XKB  specify  "on".   To disable XKB specify "off". To
           revert to the system default  specify  "reset".    The
           default is "on".

     -l    Lists  the  current  settings  for  the  session.   If
           specific  values  have  not  been  set  for particular
           attributes, default values are printed.  The mandatory
           settings  will  be  enforced  and will take precedence
           over both the user configured and system default  set-
           tings.

     -m multihead
           Enables or  disables  multihead  mode  for  X  session
           startup. By default, if a session is started on a mul-
           tihead terminal group, then the session starts in mul-
           tihead  mode  to  match  the  terminal  group  with an
           appropriate number of screens  and  geometry.  Specify
           "off"  to disable this behavior and the session starts
           on a single terminal  with  one  screen.  The  keyword
           "reset"  may  be  specified  to  reset  to  the system
           default.

     -n xrender-value
           Enable or disable the Xrender extension. To enable use
           of  extension  specify  "on".   To  disable  extension



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray User Command                                 utxconfig(1)



           specify "off". To revert to the system default specify
           "reset".   The default is "on".

     -o    Output all system settings in a  comma-delimited  text
           record.  Intended for use with -i. Outputs to standard
           output unless -f is specified.

     -p pcolor
           Parameter that specifies the level of support for  the
           PseudoColor  (8-bit) visual in the X server. The Pseu-
           doColor visual is not enabled by default. The accepted
           values  for  pcolor  are  "off",  "on", "default", and
           "reset". A pcolor value  of  "off"  will  disable  the
           PseudoColor  visual.  A  pcolor  value  of   "on" will
           enable  the  PseudoColor  visual,  but  the  TrueColor
           visual  (24-bit)  will  remain  the  default. A pcolor
           value of  "default" will enable the PseudoColor visual
           and make it the default visual, although the TrueColor
           visual will still be  available.  A  pcolor  value  of
           "reset"  will revert to the system default.  The Pseu-
           doColor visual is available only on Solaris  and  only
           when the Xsun X server is used.  A PseudoColor setting
           is ignored by the Xnewt X server.

     -q quickAbort
           Enable or disable the ability of a  user  to  abruptly
           terminate  his  own  Sun  Ray  X session by typing the
           CTRL-ALT-BKSP-BKSP key sequence into the session.   To
           enable  the quick abort feature specify "on".  To dis-
           able the quick abort feature specify "off".  To revert
           to the system default specify "reset".  The default is
           "on".

     -r res
           Parameter that specifies  the  resolution  (number  of
           pixels)  of  the X desktop canvas for the session. The
           format of res is WIDTHxHEIGHT, for example  1280x1024.
           utxconfig enforces restrictions on the possible widths
           and heights that can be specified. The keyword  "auto"
           may  also be specified, which will enable selection of
           a resolution that best matches the resolution capabil-
           ities  of  the  terminal  on  which  the  X session is
           started.  The keyword  "reset"  may  be  specified  to
           revert to the system default.

     -R geom
           Specify a preferred screen geometry in the form COLSx-
           ROWS.  At X server startup this geometry overrides the
           terminal  group  geometry  on  which  the  session  is
           started. See -m. The keyword "auto" may also be speci-
           fied as a value, which will cause the  geometry of the
           terminal  group  on which the X session is  started to



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray User Command                                 utxconfig(1)



           be used. The  keyword  "reset"  may  be  specified  to
           revert to the system default.

     -S screen-order
           Specify  a  preferred  screen  number  order  for  the
           session's  screen  group.  The order must be a legal X
           server screen placement, or the keyword  "auto"  which
           will  cause  a  default  screen ordering to be chosen.
           Manipulating the  geometry  via  the  -R  option  will
           automatically  change the screen order to an appropri-
           ate value.

     -t token
           Identifies the specific token whose settings  will  be
           the target of this invocation of utxconfig .

     -x xinerama
           Enable or disable XINERAMA extension. To enable use of
           XINERAMA  specify  "on".   To disable XINERAMA specify
           "off".  To  revert  to  the  system  default   specify
           "reset".   The default is "off".

     -v    Verbose output for -l option. When both -l and -v  are
           specified  attributes  with default values are labeled
           as such.

     The following options are RESERVED for use by  the  Sun  Ray
     Server  Software:   -c, -D, -L.  The use of these options is
     beyond the scope of this manual:


DEPRECATED OPTION
     The following option has been deprecated.

     -X Xserver

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command selects the Xsun X  server,  enables
     the  PseudoColor  visual  and  forces  the  desktop  size to
     1024x768:

     % /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig -b Xsun -r 1024x768 -p on

     Example 2: This command configures a  multihead  group  with
     two screens arranged horizontally, right and left:

     % /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig -m on -R 2x1 -S 0,1

     Example 3: This command sets the screen geometry and  order-
     ing to automatic:





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray User Command                                 utxconfig(1)



     % /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxconfig -R auto

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Types       |       Attribute Values      |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Evolving                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     Xnewt(8), Xserver(1)

NOTES
     The -X option has been deprecated and might be removed  from
     a future release.

     The settings are actually maintained  on  the  basis  of  an
     authentication  token and do not remain specific to a single
     X display number.
































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5



utxlock.1



Sun Ray User Commands                                  utxlock(1)



NAME
     utxlock - Sun Ray utility for locking a window session.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/bin/utxlock

DESCRIPTION
     The utxlock utility locks the current display  in  a  manner
     specific  to  the  current  windowing  environment.  If  the
     current environment is Gnome, it uses  xscreensaver-command;
     if the current environment is CDE, it uses dtsession; other-
     wise utxlock is used.

          Note:

          Although some users may find screen locking  an  incon-
          venience,  overriding it has security implications that
          should be obvious.  Override at your own risk.

     A user may disable any screen lock behavior by  setting  the
     environment  variable  SUN_SUNRAY_UTXLOCK_PREF  to NULL. Any
     other value will be used as a command line to use for invok-
     ing a screen lock command instead of the default behavior.

     SRSS invokes utxlock on any session disconnect.  To  disable
     this    behavior,   add   the   following   line   to   your
     $HOME/.dtprofile:

     SUN_SUNRAY_UTXLOCK_PREF=; export SUN_SUNRAY_UTXLOCK_PREF

     As another example, if a user had their own screenlock  pro-
     gram  called mylock, and they wanted to pass it the argument
     -l,  they  should  add   the   following   line   to   their
     $HOME/.dtprofile :

     SUN_SUNRAY_UTXLOCK_PREF="$HOME/bin/mylock    -l";     export
     SUN_SUNRAY_UTXLOCK_PREF

OPTIONS
     No options are supported.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWutu                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|






SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



libusbut.3



Interface library                                libusbut.so.1(3)



NAME
     libusbut.so.1 - Sun Ray libusb library for Linux


SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/libusbut.so.1

DESCRIPTION
     The Sun Ray libusb library provides Sun Ray specific support
     for libusb.

     SUNWlibusbut  rpm  delivers  the  Sun  Ray  libusb   library
     libusbut.so.1  in  /opt/SUNWut/lib.  For  building  apps the
     usb.h header file from the existing server side linux libusb
     rpm is used. Also reference libusb docs delivered as part of
     the server side libusb rpms.

     If you wish to develop libusb  applications  or  build  open
     source  libusb  applications then it is recommended that you
     refresh or upgrade your server side libusb rpm.

     Please use libusb version 0.1.8 or greater.  To find version
     of curent server side libusb do as follows:

     /usr/bin/libusb-config --version

     this should be >= 0.1.8

     Please find the libusb 0.1.8 rpms for  Suse  and  RedHat  in
     sdlc (sun download center)

     For Sun Ray users to be able  to  use  the  Sun  Ray  libusb
     library  instead of the server side libusb a few options are
     available. Any *One* of these options needs to  be  employed
     to  provide  access  to the Sun Ray libusb library by libusb
     applications.

     1)  One can use the utusbrun wrapper script  to  run  libusb
         applications.    This   will   automatically   set   the
         LD_PRELOAD and will be limited  to  the  Sun  Ray  users
         wishing to run libusb apps.

     Eg. To run the gphoto binary instead of using

     %gphoto2 --T

     do

     %/opt/SUNWut/bin/utusbrun gphoto2 --T

     2)  Or one may also  considering  doing  their  own  wrapper
         around  the  commonly  used  apps  and  set the variable



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Interface library                                libusbut.so.1(3)



         there.

     If the server side support of libusb is  not  required  (i.e
     usb  devices  are not expected to be attached to the Sun Ray
     *Server* usb port and driven by libusb) the admin  can  dis-
     able this by unlinking /usr/lib/libusb.so and creating a new
     link to Sun Ray libusb library as follows:

     ln -s /opt/SUNWut/lib/libusbut.so.1 /usr/lib/libusb.so

     With  this  approach  utusbrun  script  will  no  longer  be
     required nor will LD_PRELOAD need to be set.

     If one is going to modify sym links please bear in mind that
     this  may  have  unintentional  side  effects  when trying a
     refresh/upgrade of linux server side libusb rpms.

     3)  Or      one      can       set       LD_PRELOAD       to
         /opt/SUNWut/lib/libusbut.so.1 so that the Sun Ray libusb
         library  interface  implementations  can  interpose  the
         linux  server  side  library implementations.  This will
         however affect *all* Sun Ray users and can be done in an
         xinit rc script. Please write your own script to do this
         and put it in

     /etc/X11/xinit/xinitrc.d

     ( Please ensure that both audio and libusb work  after  this
     as this is global and affects *all* Sun Ray users )

     See the txt file in /opt/SUNWut/doc/usb/libusb.txt for addi-
     tional info.

NOTES
     The Sun Ray libusb library currently does not support:

     o     usb_interrupt_write

     o     timeouts for the I/O calls.

     Note: Do not fork processes to do I/O. Use threads instead.

     The existing libusb rpms provided with the distros  are  out
     of  date. To develop libusb applications and make use of the
     compatible header files please user version 0.1.8 of  libusb
     provided in sdlc.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Interface library                                libusbut.so.1(3)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                |  SUNWlibusbut               |
    | MT-Level                    | UnSafe                      |
    | Interface Stability         | External                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|

















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



ut_amgh_get_server_list.3



Sun Ray System APIs                    ut_amgh_get_server_list(3)



NAME
     ut_amgh_get_server_list, ut_amgh_free_server_list - APIs for
     Automated Multi-Group Hotdesking also known as Regional Hot-
     desking.

SYNOPSIS
     cc [flag ...] file ... [library ...]

     #include 

     int ut_amgh_get_server_list(const struct ut_amghargs *amghargs, struct ut_amghret *amghret);
     int ut_amgh_free_server_list(struct ut_amghret *amghret);

DESCRIPTION
     The  ut_amgh_get_server_list()  function   is   called   for
     retrieving  a  list  of  servers  associated  with the input
     parameters for the purposes of  Automated  Multi-Group  Hot-
     desking.  The  underlying AMGH PAM services will invoke this
     function to obtain a list  of  servers  which  the  Sun  Ray
     should  be redirected to. The first server in the list which
     is alive and online will be utilised.

     The ut_amghargs structure has the following entries:

              struct ut_amghargs {
                int  amghversion;     /* the version of the customer API */
                char *username;       /* the user name e.g. 'fred'*/
                char *token;          /* the token id e.g. 'Payflex.50045fda00130100'*/
                char *terminal_cid;   /* the canonical terminal id e.g. 'IEEE802.0800201e2347'*/
                char *terminal_ip_addr; /* the terminal ip address e.g. '10.23.146.12'*/
                char *insert_token;   /* the token id inserted  e.g. 'Payflex.50045fda00130100'*/
                char *display;        /* the display number e.g. ':12'*/
              };

     The ut_amghret has the following entries:

              struct ut_amghret {
                char **server_list;   /* the reference to a server array */
                char *username;       /* iff the implementation returns one else NULL */
                char *errorstr;       /* the error message */
                int  chain_amgh;      /* RESERVED for future use */
                int  use_firstserver; /* Use firstServer prop as the host */
              };

     The amghversion field is filled by the underlying  PAM  ser-
     vice    before    ut_amgh_get_server_list()    is    called.
     ut_amgh_get_server_list() should verify that amghversion  is
     >=  UT_AMGH_VERSION to protect itself from being deployed on
     old and potentially incompatible versions of  AMGH.  If  the
     test  fails  it  should  return UT_AMGH_INCOMPATIBLE_VERSION
     before  accessing  other  fields  in  the   ut_amghargs   or
     ut_amghret structures.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System APIs                    ut_amgh_get_server_list(3)



     ut_amgh_get_server_list()  may  use  the   values   of   the
     ut_amghargs  structure  to  determine  the  list of hosts to
     return to the AMGH service. It  should  set  server_list  to
     point  to  storage containing an array of pointers to fully-
     qualified hostnames or IP address strings expressed  in  the
     IPv4  standard `.' notation, with a NULL pointer as its last
     element.    If    no    suitable    hosts     are     found,
     ut_amgh_get_server_list()   should   assign   NULL   to  the
     server_list field in the structure ut_amghret. If  an  error
     is  encountered  it  should  set  errorstr in the ut_amghret
     structure to a suitable error  string,  set  server_list  to
     NULL  and  return one of the valid error codes listed below.
     ut_amgh_get_server_list() may allocate dynamic  storage  for
     use  in  the  ut_amghret structure, which will be freed by a
     later call to ut_amgh_free_server_list().

     ut_amgh_get_server_list() may also return a username.  If  a
     NULL  username is supplied by the PAM service and a username
     is returned it will be used to initialize  PAM_USER  in  the
     PAM context.

     ut_amgh_free_server_list() frees up any  memory  dynamically
     allocated  in  the ut_amghret structure. It is the responsi-
     bility   of    the    calling    application    to    invoke
     ut_amgh_free_server_list()  to  free  the memory returned by
     ut_amgh_get_server_list().

RETURN VALUES
     Upon  successful   completion,   UT_AMGH_SUCCESS   must   be
     returned.  In addition, the following values may be returned
     :

     UT_AMGH_INCOMPATIBLE_VERSION
          The version filled in struct ut_amghargs field amghver-
          sion   by   the   customer   is   not  compatible  with
          UT_AMGH_VERSION value.

     UT_AMGH_NO_PERMISSION
          No permission to access the back-end database  for  the
          server lookups.

     UT_AMGH_DB_ERROR
          Error accessing the back-end database.

     UT_AMGH_NULL_USERNAME
          The implementation requires a username to  perform  its
          lookup,  but the AMGH system was not configured to pass
          in a username and hence the ut_amghargs username  field
          was NULL.

     UT_AMGH_ERROR
          Unknown error encountered by the implementation.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System APIs                    ut_amgh_get_server_list(3)



     UT_AMGH_NOMEM
          Unable to allocate memory.

     UT_AMGH_USERNAME_CONFLICT
          More than one non-NULL user names found for the token.

NOTES
     A reference Makefile and source code for a file-based imple-
     mentation   of   the   AMGH   APIs   are   available   under
     /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/, as a learning aid for potential imple-
     mentors.   32 bit library is needed for 32 bit linux systems
     and 64 bit library is needed for 64 bit linux systems

SEE ALSO
     ut_amgh_script_interface(3)








































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



ut_amgh_script_interface.3



Sun Ray System APIs                   ut_amgh_script_interface(3)



NAME
     ut_amgh_script_interface  -  executable  API  for  Automated
     Multi-Group Hotdesking (also known as Regional Hotdesking)



SYNOPSIS
      < input > output

     input:
     [username=username]
     [token=token]
     [terminal_cid=macaddr]
     [terminal_ip_addr=dtu_IP]
     [insert_token=token]
     [display=display_number]

     output:
     [username=username]
     [host=host]
     [use_firstserver=true/false]


DESCRIPTION
     The Sun Ray Server Software Automated Multi-Group Hotdesking
     (AMGH)  system utilizes an API to obtain information about a
     username and/or a set  of  servers  for  a  Sun  Ray  to  be
     directed  to.   See the ut_amgh_get_server_list man page for
     more details.

     AMGH also can be configured to run a customer-supplied  exe-
     cutable  to  produce information for this API. This man page
     documents the  interface  that  such  an  executable  should
     implement.

     The executable will be executed with no  arguments.  On  its
     standard input stream (see intro(3)), stdin, data represent-
     ing the ut_amghargs structure contents will be written. This
     data will be in the form of key/value pairs, one per line on
     stdin.  The key name will be from the beginning of the  line
     to the first character and continue to the next newline.

     Valid lookup keys are :

     username         /* the user name  e.g. 'fred' */
     token            /* the token id   e.g. 'Payflex.50045fda00130100'*/
     terminal_cid     /* the canonical terminal id  e.g. 'IEEE802.0800201e2347'*/
     terminal_ip_addr /* the terminal ip address  e.g. '10.23.146.12'*/
     display          /* the display number e.g. ':12'*/
     insert_token     /* the token id inserted  e.g. 'Payflex.50045fda00130100'*/
                      /* This is useful in cases where inserted token is different */
                      /* from the session token, for eg when the registered policy */



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System APIs                   ut_amgh_script_interface(3)



                      /* is in effect */


     Lines containing keys which are unrecognized  should  simply
     be  discarded  from stdin and the executable should continue
     parsing the remaining input until EOF is reached.

     At that point the executable should perform its lookup. If a
     username  is  to be returned, it should write a key/value to
     standard output (stdout) of the form:

     username=USERNAME

     where USERNAME is the value returned by the lookup.  It  may
     also return any number of lines of the form:

     host=HOST

     where each HOST represents either a fully-qualified hostname
     or an IP address.

     The script could also return the following values :

     use_firstserver=[true | false]

     The usage of these options is beyond the scope of  this  man
     page  and will be discussed in details in the software docu-
     mentation.  These are documented here for completeness.  The
     return  values  for  these  options  can  also be a non-zero
     number (true) or 0 (false).

ERRORS
     If an error is encountered during the lookup, the executable
     may  write  a  descriptive  error  message to standard error
     (stderr), which will be included in the error log  and  exit
     with a suitable error code (see EXIT VALUES).

EXIT VALUES
     Exit  values  should  correspond  to  the  error  codes   in
     /opt/SUNWut/include/utamgh.h.

     If no errors are encountered during the lookup, the  execut-
     able should exit with a status of 0 (UT_AMGH_SUCCESS).

     Note that if the lookup does not produce a  match,  this  is
     not  considered  an error. In this case, no stdout should be
     generated, and the executable should exit with a status of 0
     (UT_AMGH_SUCCESS).

     If the executable exits with  a  non-zero  exit  status,  an
     error  will be logged corresponding to the value of the exit
     status.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System APIs                   ut_amgh_script_interface(3)



SEE ALSO
     ut_amgh_get_server_list(3)





















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



ut_ati_script_interface.3



Sun Ray System APIs                    ut_ati_script_interface(3)



NAME
     ut_ati_script_interface - executable API for Automatic Token
     Importation



SYNOPSIS
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/site/bin/ati < input > output

     input:
     insert_token=token
     [terminal_cid=macaddr]

     output:
     registered=0
     or
     registered=1
     name=Full 'user' name
     [otherInfo=Other Information]


DESCRIPTION
     The Sun Ray  Server  Software  Automatic  Token  Importation
     (ATI)  system  utilizes an API to obtain information about a
     token  for  use  in  registration  of  that  token,  when  a
     registered-only policy is in effect.

     When a new card token is inserted, if a registered-only pol-
     icy is in effect for cards, ATI will run a customer-supplied
     executable (with root privilege) to produce information  for
     this API. This man page documents the interface that such an
     executable should implement.

     The      executable      should      be      copied       to
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/site/bin/ati.   It must be owned by root and
     have a mode that does not permit writing by group  or  other
     (see chmod(1)).  It must not be a symlink.

     It will be executed with no arguments. On its standard input
     stream  (see  intro(3)),  stdin, data will be written in the
     form of key/value pairs, one per line  on  stdin.   The  key
     name will be from the beginning of the line to the first '='
     character, and the value string will begin after  the  first
     '=' character and continue to the following newline.

  INPUT
     Provided input keys are :

     insert_token  /* the token id inserted e.g. 'Payflex.50045fda00130100' */

     In addition, the following key is provided when a  token  is
     being checked for importation.  It will not be provided when



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System APIs                    ut_ati_script_interface(3)



     the previously-imported token is being checked for deletion.

     terminal_cid  /* the canonical terminal id  e.g. 'IEEE802.0800201e2347' */

     Lines containing keys which are unrecognized  should  simply
     be  discarded  from stdin and the executable should continue
     parsing the remaining input until EOF is reached.

  OUTPUT
     After parsing the provided input the executable should  per-
     form  its  lookup. If the token should not be allowed access
     to a session, it should write a key/value to standard output
     (stdout) of the form:

     registered=0

     If the token  should  be  allowed  access,  it  should  emit
     key/value strings to standard output (stdout) of the form:

     registered=1
     name=Full name for token 'user'

     It may also emit information to be used in the registration,
     using the following key:

     otherInfo=Additional information for token

     See the utuser(1m) man page description of the -a option for
     a discussion of treatment of these values.  These values are
     not utilized by SRSS and are for customer use.

     If the executable emits registered=1 and is invoked  due  to
     an unrecognized token being presented to the system, a local
     registration for the token will be  created  and  a  session
     will be granted for the token.

     If the executable emits registered=0 and is invoked  due  to
     utatiscrub(1m),  then if the token is registered locally due
     to ATI the local token registration will be deleted and ses-
     sions will be denied for the token when presented in future.
     This will not affect any active session connections  to  the
     token.

  NOTES AND BEST PRACTICE
     It's likely that customers will want  to  install  the  same
     site script on all members of a FOG, otherwise unpredictable
     behavior may result.

     Reference source which can be used as an example when  writ-
     ing an executable that implements this API can be found in:
     /opt/SUNWutref/ati/utatiref_script




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System APIs                    ut_ati_script_interface(3)



ERRORS
     If an error is encountered during the lookup, the executable
     may  write  a  descriptive  error  message to standard error
     (stderr) and exit with a non-zero status.  The message writ-
     ten to stderr will be included in the error log.

EXIT VALUES
     Exit values should be non-zero if an error prevents success-
     ful execution.

     If no errors are encountered during the lookup, the  execut-
     able should exit with a status of 0.

     Note that if the lookup does not produce a  match,  this  is
     not  considered an error. In this case, a string of the form
     "registered=0" should be written to stdout, and the  execut-
     able should exit with a status of 0.

EXAMPLE
     ATI scripts can easily be hand-tested to  verify  that  they
     work properly, as follows:

     % echo "insert_token=MicroPayflex.12345" | /etc/opt/SUNWut/site/bin/ati
     name="Fred Shalestone"
     otherInfo="Rubble Mining Company"
     registered=1
     % echo $?
     0

SEE ALSO
     utatiscrub(1m), utuser(1m), ut_amgh_script_interface(3)
























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utadem.4



Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utadem(4)



NAME
     utadem - Sun Ray audio driver emulator.

SYNOPSIS
     /dev/utadem

DESCRIPTION
     utadem provides a generic virtual audio interface to Sun Ray
     DTU's.  The  actual interface to the DTU is through a daemon
     that is session-aware. The daemon connects to utadem through
     a master port and is responsible for creating the slave dev-
     ice nodes which connect to normal audio applications.

API
     The exact capabilities of the audio device  emulated  depend
     on the OS and audio daemon.

     Solaris Applications that normally open /dev/audio  may  use
             utadem  as  long  as they have some way of selecting
             the audio device, such  as  through  the  -d  device
             switch,  or the AUDIODEV environment variable.  Com-
             pliance to the standard audio(7I) interface is  han-
             dled in the following manner:

             Audio Data Formats
                   The data formats supported depend on the  dae-
                   mon.  Please refer to the daemon documentation
                   for its capabilities.

             Audio Ports
                   Input and  output  audio  ports  are  directly
                   dependent  on  the  Sun Ray DTU and not on the
                   daemon. The daemon is capable  of  discovering
                   the type and quantity of input ports available
                   and report them in the record.avail_ports  and
                   play.avail_ports   fields  of  the  audio_info
                   structure. Although  the  ports  can  be  con-
                   trolled  directly,  the actual audio output is
                   generally a mix of multiple services,  so  the
                   play.gain  setting is the contribution of this
                   audio device to the  total  experience.  Since
                   recording  is  exclusive  of a single service,
                   the record.gain  and  record.balance  controls
                   directly affect the hardware gain.

             Sample Granularity
                   Since the utadem driver is working  through  a
                   daemon  which transfers the audio data over an
                   interconnect, larger granularities and  jitter
                   in the reporting of sample counts is possible.
                   At any given time, the reported input and out-
                   put  sample  counts  will vary from the actual



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utadem(4)



                   sample count by no more than the size  of  the
                   buffers  it  is  transferring. Programs should
                   not rely upon the  absolute  accuracy  of  the
                   play.samples  and record.samples fields of the
                   audio_info structure.

             Audio Status Change Notification
                   As described in audio(7I), it is  possible  to
                   request  asynchronous  notification  of  state
                   changes in an audio device.

     Linux   Compliance to the standard Open Sound  System  (OSS)
             interface is handled in the following manner:

             Audio Data Formats
                   Same as Solaris.

             Audio Ports
                   Input and  output  audio  ports  are  directly
                   dependent  on  the  Sun Ray DTU and not on the
                   daemon. The daemon is capable  of  discovering
                   the  type  and quantity of  input ports avail-
                   able. Use the OSS mixer  interface  to  deter-
                   mine which ports are available

             Sample Granularity
                   Same as Solaris.


             The following OSS features are unsupported:

                  SNDCTL_DSP_REALTIME
                        Realtime capabilities are not supported.

                  SNDCTL_CAP_MMAP
                        Device DMA memory  mapping  is  not  sup-
                        ported.

                  /dev/audio
                        /dev/audio  interface  is  not  currently
                        supported.  Use /dev/dsp with appropriate
                        format settings instead

ERRORS
     Solaris utadem errors  are  defined  in  the  audio(7I)  man
             pages.  If  the  daemon  has  exited,  further audio
             operations are  no  longer  possible  on  the  slave
             ports.  Audio  programs  must exit in order to clear
             this error.  New  opens  will  return  ENODEV.  Data
             writes  and ioctl operations will return ENXIO. Data
             reads will complete normally and  then  return  end-
             of-file.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utadem(4)



     Linux   are there any?

FILES
     The following file is used:

        o  /dev/utadem


     Master port for daemons.

     The logical device name of the slave  port  depends  on  the
     daemon.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Solaris                     |                             |
    | Availability                | SUNWutu                     |
    | MT-Level                    | Safe                        |
    | Linux                       |                             |
    | Availability                | SUNWutkau                   |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     Solaris and Linux
             utaudio(1), ioctl(2)

     Solaris attributes(5), audio(7I), streamio(7I)























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utdisk.4



Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utdisk(4)



NAME
     utdisk, utdiskctl - Sun Ray Mass  Storage  device  and  con-
     troller drivers.

SYNOPSIS
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/partition_name

DESCRIPTION
     The utdisk and utdiskctl drivers provide a  block  interface
     to  mass  storage  devices  connected  to Sun Ray appliances
     (DTUs).

     The actual interface to the DTU for each of these drivers is
     through  the Sun Ray interconnect via the utstoraged(8) dae-
     mon.

     The utmountd(8) daemon mounts devices  with  OS-recognizable
     filesystems on them.

API
     Applications open  a  device  link  created  by  utstoraged.
     Links   to   block   device   nodes   are   created  in  the
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk directory.

ERRORS
     EACCES    Permission denied.

     EBUSY     The partition was opened  exclusively  by  another
               thread.

     EFAULT    The argument features a bad address.

     EINVAL    Invalid argument.

     ENOTTY    The device does not support the requested  ioctl()
               function.

     ENXIO     The device did not exist  when  attempting  opera-
               tion.

     EAGAIN    Resource temporarily unavailable.

     EINTR     A signal was caught during the  execution  of  the
               ioctl() function.

     ENOMEM    Insufficient memory.

     EROFS     The device is read-only.

     EPERM     Insufficient access rights.

     EIO       An I/O error occurred.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utdisk(4)



FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /var/log/messages


     System messages file.

        o  $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/name


     Block interface to disk or partition.

     Where name is a string descriptive of the device type with a
     suffix denoting the partition number or UNIX slice number.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1:

     The block  device  link  for  the  full  disk  is  given  by
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/disk1

     Example 2:

     The block device link for the  2nd  partition  is  given  by
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/disk1p2

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray appliance associated with a user's session.

SEE ALSO
     utstoraged(8), utmountd(8), utdiskadm(8)

WARNINGS
     On Linux, writes to some filesystems  are  asynchronous.  If
     the  device  is  unplugged without unmounting the filesystem
     first, some data could get lost.

     Users are strongly advised to use the  utdiskadm(8)  command
     to prepare the device for removal before unplugging the dev-
     ice or disconnecting their session.

NOTES
     Users have access rights only to storage  devices  connected
     to the Sun Ray DTU on which their session is active and only
     for as long as it is active. When  the  session  is  discon-
     nected from the Sun Ray DTU whether through logout, hotdesk-
     ing, server switching, or any other reason, ownership of the
     storage  device  is  lost and all pending data transfers are
     aborted. This can result in the filesystem on the media get-
     ting corrupted and data getting lost.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utdiskctl.4



Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utdisk(4)



NAME
     utdisk, utdiskctl - Sun Ray Mass  Storage  device  and  con-
     troller drivers.

SYNOPSIS
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/partition_name

DESCRIPTION
     The utdisk and utdiskctl drivers provide a  block  interface
     to  mass  storage  devices  connected  to Sun Ray appliances
     (DTUs).

     The actual interface to the DTU for each of these drivers is
     through  the Sun Ray interconnect via the utstoraged(8) dae-
     mon.

     The utmountd(8) daemon mounts devices  with  OS-recognizable
     filesystems on them.

API
     Applications open  a  device  link  created  by  utstoraged.
     Links   to   block   device   nodes   are   created  in  the
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk directory.

ERRORS
     EACCES    Permission denied.

     EBUSY     The partition was opened  exclusively  by  another
               thread.

     EFAULT    The argument features a bad address.

     EINVAL    Invalid argument.

     ENOTTY    The device does not support the requested  ioctl()
               function.

     ENXIO     The device did not exist  when  attempting  opera-
               tion.

     EAGAIN    Resource temporarily unavailable.

     EINTR     A signal was caught during the  execution  of  the
               ioctl() function.

     ENOMEM    Insufficient memory.

     EROFS     The device is read-only.

     EPERM     Insufficient access rights.

     EIO       An I/O error occurred.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray Device Driver                                   utdisk(4)



FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /var/log/messages


     System messages file.

        o  $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/name


     Block interface to disk or partition.

     Where name is a string descriptive of the device type with a
     suffix denoting the partition number or UNIX slice number.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1:

     The block  device  link  for  the  full  disk  is  given  by
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/disk1

     Example 2:

     The block device link for the  2nd  partition  is  given  by
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk/disk1p2

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray appliance associated with a user's session.

SEE ALSO
     utstoraged(8), utmountd(8), utdiskadm(8)

WARNINGS
     On Linux, writes to some filesystems  are  asynchronous.  If
     the  device  is  unplugged without unmounting the filesystem
     first, some data could get lost.

     Users are strongly advised to use the  utdiskadm(8)  command
     to prepare the device for removal before unplugging the dev-
     ice or disconnecting their session.

NOTES
     Users have access rights only to storage  devices  connected
     to the Sun Ray DTU on which their session is active and only
     for as long as it is active. When  the  session  is  discon-
     nected from the Sun Ray DTU whether through logout, hotdesk-
     ing, server switching, or any other reason, ownership of the
     storage  device  is  lost and all pending data transfers are
     aborted. This can result in the filesystem on the media get-
     ting corrupted and data getting lost.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utparallel.4



Sun Ray Device Driver                               utparallel(4)



NAME
     utparallel, utserial - Sun Ray serial and parallel port dev-
     ice driver emulators.

SYNOPSIS
     #include 

     #include 

  utserial
     #include 

     #include 

  utparallel
     #include 

DESCRIPTION
     utserial is a tty-style interface that  provides  a  generic
     virtual  interface  to  USB serial adaptors connected to the
     Sun Ray DTU.

     utparallel is a parallel-style  interface  that  provides  a
     generic virtual interface to USB parallel adaptors connected
     to the Sun Ray DTU.

     utserial and utparallel are each loadable STREAMS drivers.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
     The actual interface to the DTU for each of these drivers is
     through  the  Sun  Ray interconnect via either the utseriald
     daemon or the utparalleld daemon, each of which is  session-
     aware.  The  daemons  are  connected  to  either utserial or
     utparallel through a master port and each is responsible for
     creating  the slave device nodes through which normal appli-
     cations will connect.

API
     Applications open a device file created by either  utseriald
     or  utparalleld. Device files created by utseriald comply to
     the  termio(7I)  interface  and  device  files  created   by
     utparalleld comply to the ecpp(7D) interface. Hardware limi-
     tations in USB adaptors might prevent compliance with  these
     interfaces.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /dev/utserial






SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray Device Driver                               utparallel(4)



     Master port for utserial

        o  /dev/utparallel


     Master port for utparallel

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWutu                     |
    | MT-Level                    | Safe                        |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utseriald(1M), utparalleld(1M), termio(7I), ecpp(7D)



































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utserial.4



Sun Ray Device Driver                                 utserial(4)



NAME
     utserial, utparallel - Sun Ray serial and parallel port dev-
     ice driver emulators.

SYNOPSIS
     #include 

     #include 

  utserial
     #include 

     #include 

  utparallel
     #include 

DESCRIPTION
     utserial is a tty-style interface that  provides  a  generic
     virtual  interface  to  USB serial adaptors connected to the
     Sun Ray DTU.

     utparallel is a parallel-style  interface  that  provides  a
     generic virtual interface to USB parallel adaptors connected
     to the Sun Ray DTU.

     utserial and utparallel are each loadable STREAMS drivers.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
     The actual interface to the DTU for each of these drivers is
     through  the  Sun  Ray interconnect via either the utseriald
     daemon or the utparalleld daemon, each of which is  session-
     aware.  The  daemons  are  connected  to  either utserial or
     utparallel through a master port and each is responsible for
     creating  the slave device nodes through which normal appli-
     cations will connect.

API
     Applications open a device file created by either  utseriald
     or  utparalleld. Device files created by utseriald comply to
     the  termio(7I)  interface  and  device  files  created   by
     utparalleld comply to the ecpp(7D) interface. Hardware limi-
     tations in USB adaptors might prevent compliance with  these
     interfaces.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /dev/utserial






SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray Device Driver                                 utserial(4)



     Master port for utserial

        o  /dev/utparallel


     Master port for utparallel

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWutu                     |
    | MT-Level                    | Safe                        |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utseriald(1M), utparalleld(1M), termio(7I), ecpp(7D)



































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



auth.props.5



Sun Ray File Format                                 auth.props(5)



NAME
     auth.props -  Sun Ray  authentication  daemon  configuration
     file.

SYNOPSIS
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props

DESCRIPTION
     The auth.props file  contains  the  Sun  Ray  Authentication
     Manager's configuration properties. Changes to many of these
     properties are not supported and should not be set to  other
     than the default values.

OPTIONS
     The following options are available:

     adminConfigFile=filename
           This file contains the administrative database  confi-
           guration information.

     allowAnnotations=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED. When set true, any application  can  con-
           nect from any IP address and annotate a session. Anno-
           tations are restricted to keywords prefixed  by  "x_".
           Values are not restricted.

     allowFWLoad=boolean
           Specifies whether or not the utload command is allowed
           to download firmware to DTUs connected to this Authen-
           tication Manager.

     allowLANConnections=boolean
           When set true the DTU  connections  are  allowed  from
           public LAN interfaces, as well as from private Sun Ray
           interconnect interfaces.

     cbport=portNumber
           UNSUPPORTED. The  Authentication  Manager  listens  on
           this  port  for connections from the utsessiond daemon
           and other programs, such as utload.

     cbtimeout=seconds
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the read timeout in seconds for
           programs that connect to the cbport.

     controllers=maximum
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the  maximum  number  of  spare
           threads  that  are  available for handling new connec-
           tions from applications such as utload(8).

     enableGroupManager=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED.  Flag  to  turn  on  the  group   manager



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray File Format                                 auth.props(5)



           function.

     enableLoadBalancing=boolean
           Flag to turn on group manager load balancing.

     enableMulticast=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED. Flag to enable/disable use  of  multicast
           in group manager.  If disabled, group manager will use
           broadcast.

     forceSessionLocation=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED. Flag to force use of sessionHost and ses-
           sionPort  settings  from  this  file regardless of the
           various authentication modules.

     gmDebug=level
           UNSUPPORTED. Group manager debugging level.

     gmKeepAliveInterval=seconds
           UNSUPPORTED. The group manager uses this as  the  time
           in seconds between broadcast keepalive messages.

     gmport=port
           UNSUPPORTED. The group manager uses this port to  send
           and  receive  keepalive/discovery  messages from other
           Authentication Managers.

     gmSignatureFile=file
           The group manager can "sign" messages to  other  group
           managers  based  on  the contents of a signature file.
           Other group managers with the same signature file con-
           tents  are  "trusted".  To be usable, the file must be
           owned by 'root' and must not be readable, writable, or
           executable  by anyone else; it must contain at least 8
           bytes, at least two of which are letters and at  least
           one which is a non-letter printable character.

     gmTargets=hostlist
           The group manager will send  unicast  group  announce-
           ments  to  all  hosts  specified in the hostlist list.
           The list is a comma-separated sequence of server names
           and  IP  addresses.  Unicast group announcements, when
           configured, are  sent  in  addition  to  multicast  or
           broadcast  announcements.   The  utgmtarget(8) command
           may be used to maintain a group-wide list  of  unicast
           targets.

     log=filename
           UNSUPPORTED. This option specifies a  file  that  con-
           tains the log messages.

     logAddTimeStamp=boolean



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray File Format                                 auth.props(5)



           UNSUPPORTED. Add your own  timestamp  to  syslog  mes-
           sages.  This  may  be  appropriate for debugging or in
           cases where a remote syslog server is being  used  and
           higher resolution timestamps are required.

     logFacility=value
           The logFacility can  be  one  of  the  following:kern,
           user,  mail,  daemon,  auth,  syslog, lpr, news, uucp,
           cron, local0, local1, local2, local3, local4,  local5,
           local6, local7

     Log files
           Log priorities for different utauthd  message  classes
           can  be one of the following: emerg, alert, crit, err,
           warning, notice, info, debug, OFF.

           The message classes are:

           logPriClientError=value

           logPriDebug=value

           logPriNotice=value

           logPriWarning=value

           logPriConfigError=value

           logPriUnexpectedError=value

     maxStarting=maximum
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the maximum number  of  threads
           that can be simultaneously initiating a session. Addi-
           tional threads wanting to start or  verify  a  session
           wait  for previous threads to finish starting or veri-
           fying a session.

     moduleDir=directoryName
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the location of the authentica-
           tion modules.

     multicastTTL=integer
           UNSUPPORTED.  Time-to-live  parameter  for  forwarding
           multicast  packets.   If set above one, keepalive mes-
           sages can pass through routers.

     noClaimSleepTime=seconds
           UNSUPPORTED. The amount of time in  seconds  to  sleep
           after a token has been offered to all of the authenti-
           cation modules and before notifying the DTU  that  the
           authentication failed.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray File Format                                 auth.props(5)



     policy=filename
           Specifies the location of  the  authentication  policy
           specification.

     port=portNumber
           The utauthd daemon listens on this  port  for  connec-
           tions from Sun Ray DTUs.

     quickTimeout=seconds
           DTUs are required to respond to  a  message  from  the
           server within the time specified by seconds. This time
           is used to detect whether a request for  access  to  a
           currently connected session is an attempt to take over
           this session with a spoofed token or  if  the  DTU  to
           which the session is connected had a device or network
           failure. Protection against  malicious  session  take-
           over,  especially  on  heavily  loaded servers, can be
           improved by raising the value  of  this  timeout.  The
           regular  mechanism  to detect and expire 'dead' termi-
           nals, controlled by the timeout setting, will be  used
           independently,  so  setting  quickTimeout  to  a value
           greater than timeout is not  meaningful.  For  maximum
           protection  the  value zero (0) can be used for quick-
           Timeout  to  completely  disable  the  quick   timeout
           mechanism  and  use  only  the regular 'dead' terminal
           detection.

     remoteSelect=boolean
           If true, the remote server  selection  option  of  the
           utselect(1) command is enabled by default.

     reportAllDesktopEvents=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED.  When  true,  all  desktop   events   are
           reported  instead  of  being  filtered  to  just those
           events that change the "exists" state of the DTU.

     selectAtLogin=boolean
           If true, activates a utselect -L GUI allowing the user
           to select a Sun Ray server before logging into CDE. If
           only one server is available, the GUI exits  automati-
           cally.  Refer to the utselect man page for more infor-
           mation on the -L option.

     sessionHost=hostname
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the host  name  of  the  server
           that  is  running  the  default  utsessiond  for  this
           Authentication Manager.

     sessionPort=portNumber
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the port number of  the  server
           that  is  running  the  default  utsessiond  for  this
           Authentication Manager.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray File Format                                 auth.props(5)



     sessionTypesFile=filename
           Specifies a file that contains mappings  from  session
           types  to  the associated session startup and shutdown
           commands.

     smartcardConfigSource = 
           The keys in this property specify the order  in  which
           to  search  for  the  configuration files. The special
           reserved key LDAP means  go  to  the  configured  LDAP
           database.  Any  other  value  refers  to a local probe
           order file.

     smtimeout=seconds
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the read timeout in seconds for
           reading messages from the utsessiond daemon.

     termAddrIsSecret=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED. When true, the IP  address  and  port  of
           DTUs  are  not reported in the dynamic status informa-
           tion provided  on  port  cbport  in  response  to  the
           string.

     terminalokens = 
           UNSUPPORTED. Define the types of tokens that are  han-
           dled  by the terminal rather than by the auth manager.
           If a token of this type is seen, the auth manager will
           use the ID value generated by the terminal rather than
           trying to determine the ID on the server.

     terminateEnable=boolean
           UNSUPPORTED. Enable  the  cleanup  of  empty  sessions
           based  on  notification  from the session manager. The
           default is enabled.

     timeout=seconds
           UNSUPPORTED. DTUs are required to send  a  message  to
           the  Authentication  Manager  at least once every time
           period specified by seconds.

     tokenDir=directory
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies a directory that  contains  the
           mappings  from logical token names to session identif-
           iers. The persistent storage of these mappings  allows
           the utauthd daemon to recover its state after restart-
           ing. This state is reset on reboot of the system.

     token.equiv=filename
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies a file that  contains  mappings
           from one raw token name to another.

     workers=maximum
           UNSUPPORTED. Specifies the  maximum  number  of  spare



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5






Sun Ray File Format                                 auth.props(5)



           threads  that  are  available for handling new connec-
           tions from Sun Ray DTUs.

FILES
     The following files are used:

          /etc/init.d/utsvc
                This is the system startup  script  that  invokes
                the  daemon  /opt/SUNWut/lib/utsessiond. The ses-
                sion manager performs the actual session  switch-
                ing function.


ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWutr                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utauthd(8),   utpolicy(8),    utsessiond(8),    utselect(1),
     utgmtarget(8)





























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          6



utadmin.conf.5



Sun Ray File Format                               utadmin.conf(5)



NAME
     utadmin.conf - Sun Ray server  administration  configuration
     file.

SYNOPSIS
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

DESCRIPTION
     The utadmin.conf file is a contains configuration parameters
     for the Sun Ray server administration database.

     The admin.defaultlocale parameter (see below)  is  the  only
     parameter  that should be changed once the Sun Ray server is
     configured and in use. All other parameters are reserved.

PROPERTIES
     The supported configuration parameters are listed below. For
     each one, the name, description, and an example are given.

     Name  Description

     admin.defaultlocale
           The default locale for Web-based Administration  Tool.
           Supported values:

           Solaris   "en_US" (US English),  "fr"  (French),  "ja"
                     (Japanese), "zh" (Simplified Chinese).

           Linux     "en_us"  (US  English),  "fr_FR"   (French),
                     "ja_JP.eucjp"  (Japanese),  "zh_CN" (Simpli-
                     fied Chinese).

     admin.dstatus.dbfile
           The name of the NDBM  data  files  where  the  desktop
           status is stored.

     admin.http.cfile
           Configuration file  for  the  Sun  Ray  Administration
           Server.

     admin.http.port
           The webserver port used by the Administration Tool.

     admin.server.name
           The name of the server where the administration  data-
           base  LDAP  server process is running. This is usually
           the host name of the Sun Ray server.

     admin.subtree
           The subtree within the LDAP hierarchy  where  Sun  Ray
           administration  data  for this server resides. This is
           an entry under the UT root entry that was specified by



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray File Format                               utadmin.conf(5)



           utconfig.

     admin.user.name
           The LDAP user that the administration  clients  should
           bind as to perform privileged operations.

     admin.ustatus.dbfile
           The name of the NDBM data files where the user  status
           is stored.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Configuration parameters for the  LDAP  and  NDBM
     databases:

     Solaris and Linux
               admin.server.name      = sray-139
               admin.server.port      = 7012
               admin.user.name        = cn=utadmin,utname=sray-139,o=v1,o=utdata
               admin.subtree          = utname=sray-139,o=v1,o=utdata
               admin.defaultlocale    = en_US
               admin.dstatus.dbfile   = /var/opt/SUNWut/ndbm/dstatus
               admin.ustatus.dbfile   = /var/opt/SUNWut/ndbm/ustatus

               admin.http.port        = 1660
               admin.ssl.enable       =

     Solaris
               admin.http.cfile       = /usr/apache/httpd.conf

     Linux
               admin.http.cfile       = /usr/apache/conf/httpd.conf #(on JDS only)
               admin.http.cfile       = /etc/httpd/conf/httpd.conf #(on RHAS only)

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWutr                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utinstall(1M), utconfig(1M), utuser(1M), utdesktop(1M)

     Sun Ray Server Software 4.3 Administrator's Guide








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utdialog_responses.props.5



Sun Ray File Format                   utdialog_responses.props(5)



NAME
     utdialog_responses.props -  Sun Ray  Automatic  Installation
     and Configuration configuration file.

SYNOPSIS
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/*.utdialog_responses.props

DESCRIPTION
     The  utdialog_responses.props  files  contain  the  Sun  Ray
     Automatic Installation and Configuration system's configura-
     tion properties. They are partitioned into a number of files
     all  prefaced  with  a string identifying which component of
     Sun Ray Software they configure.

     The contents of these  files  are  created  by  running  AIC
     Clients  (see  AIC(8)-fR),  most  notably through use of the
     utsetup command. The  user  responses  to  the  installation
     and/or  configuration  prompts  are  stored  in these files,
     which can then be copied to another system to  automate  its
     installation  and configuration by using the utsetup -a com-
     mand.

     Note that the contents of these files may contain  security-
     sensitive information such as passwords, so appropriate care
     should be taken when copying them on disk or across  a  net-
     work.

     This man page is not intended to provide comprehensive docu-
     mentation  for  all  the  properties  required to completely
     automate installation or configuration.

OPTIONS
     The following most significant options are available:

  Component: SRSS
     utsetup.LAN_EnableYN=response
           response should be Y or N

     utsetup.FirmwareConfigYN=response
           response should be Y or N

     utinstall.JavaPathname=pathname
           The path to the directory containing the  JRE  to  use
           for Sun Ray Software

     utconfig.srwa.ConfigureWebAdminYN=response
           response should be Y or N

     utconfig.srwa.EnableSecureConnectionsYN=response
           response should be Y or N

     utconfig.srwa.EnableRemoteServerAdministrationYN=response



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray File Format                   utdialog_responses.props(5)



           response should be Y or N

     utconfig.srwa.TomcatInstallDirectory=pathname
           pathname should be the path to the installation direc-
           tory for Tomcat

     utconfig.srwa.HTTPPortNumber=port
           port should be the port number to use for HTTP

     utconfig.srwa.HTTPSPortNumber=port
           port should be the port number to use for HTTPS

     utconfig.srwa.TomcatProcessUsername=username
           username should be the username to be created for  use
           with the Tomcat daemon processes.

  Component: SRCS
     utconfig.ConfigureFailover=response
           response should be Y or N

     utpw.Password=password
           password should be  the  administration  password  (in
           ROT13-encoded text)

     utgroupsig.Signature=signature
           signature should be the HA group signature (in  ROT13-
           encoded text)

     utpolicy.PolicyString=policy
           policy should be the policy specification as would  be
           specified  on  the  utpolicy  command line (see utpol-
           icy(8)).

     utreplica.PrimaryList=primary
           primary should be the name  of  the  SRDS  replication
           Primary for the HA group

     utreplica.SecondaryList=secondaries
           secondaries should be the names of the  SRDS  replica-
           tion Secondaries for the HA group, separated by spaces

     utreplica.ReplicationPort=port
           port should typically be 7012

  Component: SRCS.kiosk
     utconfig.kiosk.ConfigureKiosk=response
           response should be Y or N

     utconfig.kiosk.UserPrefix=prefix
           prefix should be the prefix to  be  applied  to  Kiosk
           usernames




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray File Format                   utdialog_responses.props(5)



     utconfig.kiosk.Group=groupname
           groupname should be the group name to be  created  for
           use with Kiosk

     utconfig.kiosk.UIDRangeStart=uid
           uid should be the lowest UID  number  to  utilize  for
           Kiosk users

     utconfig.kiosk.NumUsers=num
           num should be the number of Kiosk users to be created

  Component: SRWC
     utconfig.uttscadm.Groupname=groupname
           groupname should be the group name to be  created  for
           use with SRWC

     utconfig.uttscadm.GroupID=gid
           gid should be the group ID to be used with SRWC

SEE ALSO
     utsetup(8),    utconfig(8),    utpolicy(8),    utreplica(8),
     uttscadm(8), utpw(8), utgroupsig(8), utinstall(8), AIC(8)

































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utslaunch.properties.5



Sun Ray File Format                       utslaunch.properties(5)



NAME
     utslaunch.properties - Default hotkey key  combinations  for
     various applications supported by utslaunch.

SYNOPSIS
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_defaults.properties

     ~/.utslaunch.properties

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_mandatory.properties

DESCRIPTION
     The files listed above are standard  Java  properties  files
     that  can  contain defaults which customize the operation of
     the utslaunch application. Each file contains entries in the
     format of:

     name=value

     where name is the property name and value is the value set.

EXTENDED DESCRIPTION
     When the utslaunch application  starts,  it  looks  for  and
     reads  the  properties files in the order listed below. Note
     that a hotkey key combination specified in  a  file  can  be
     overridden by a file read later in the search order.

     1. /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_defaults.properties

        This file contains site-wide default properties which are
        used  if the user has not specified any. These properties
        override any application defaults.

     2. ~/.utslaunch.properties

        This file contains the user's default  properties.  These
        properties  override  application  and  site-wide default
        properties.

     3. /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_mandatory.properties

        This file contains site-wide mandatory default properties
        which  supersede  any  application,  site-wide,  or  user
        defaults.

PROPERTIES
     The supported application properties are listed  below.  For
     each  property,  the name, description, application default,
     and some examples are given.

     Name - utdetach.hotkey




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray File Format                       utslaunch.properties(5)



     Description - Specifies the hotkey or key  combination  that
     disconnects  the  current  session  from the DTU the user is
     currently using. The value is a valid X keysym name preceded
     by one or more of the supported modifiers (Ctrl, Shift, Alt,
     Meta).

     Application Default - Shift Pause (Hold down Shift and press
     the Pause key)

     Name - utsettings.hotkey

     Description - Specifies the hotkey or key  combination  that
     invokes  the  Sun  Ray  Settings  dialog box. The value is a
     valid X keysym name preceded by one or more of the supported
     modifiers (Ctrl, Shift, Alt, Meta).

     Application Default - Shift SunProps (Hold  down  Shift  and
     press the Props key)

     Examples:

        o  F3

        o  Shift F4

        o  Ctrl Shift Alt F5

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: The following is a sample of the  contents  of  a
     properties file.

     utdetach.hotkey=Shift Pause
     utsettings.hotkey=Shift SunProps

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Types       |       Attribute Values      |
    | Availability                | SUNWutr                     |
    | Stability Level             | Evolving                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utslaunch(1M), utdetach(1M)








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



AIC.8



Standards, Environments, and Macros                        AIC(8)



NAME
     AIC - Automatic Installation and Configuration

DESCRIPTION
     AIC is a  framework  for  automating  dialogs  for  Sun  Ray
     Software  applications. Applications utilizing the framework
     are referred to as AIC clients. By default, AIC clients will
     prompt the user for input in the standard fashion (but util-
     izing stderr instead of stdout), read a response, and record
     the  response  to  a  COMP.utdialog_responses.props  file in
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/, where COMP is used to  categor-
     ize  responses  depending  on  the area of the product which
     delivers the client. Currently defined areas are SRSS, SRCS,
     SRCS.kiosk,  and SRWC. Every dialog prompt has an associated
     key, and that key is used with the response value  to  iden-
     tify  and locate the response in the future. The most signi-
     ficant keys and the specific files they reside in are  docu-
     mented on the utdialog_responses.props(5) man page.

     AIC clients  can  be  invoked  to  use  responses  from  the
     utdialog_responses.props  files. This is typically indicated
     by the -a option, but it may be a different option for  some
     commands.  If  no  response is available for the prompt, the
     user will be prompted for input, and the  response  will  be
     recorded in the utdialog_responses.props file.

     Most AIC clients can be invoked to  use  default  responses.
     This  is typically indicated by the -d option, but it may be
     a different option for some commands. If the  -a  option  is
     provided  in  addition  to the -d option, responses from the
     utdialog_responses.props  files  are  used  first.   If   no
     response  is  available  for  the  prompt,  the user will be
     prompted  for  input,  and  the  response  recorded  in  the
     utdialog_responses.props file.

     Prompts that ask for passwords and similar data have special
     behavior.   For   interactive   prompting,  echoing  of  the
     responses on the terminal is  suppressed  and  the  user  is
     prompted twice. This is repeated until both responses match.
     The  responses  for  such  prompts   are   stored   in   the
     utdialog_responses.props file using ROT13 encoding.

     At this time, the following Sun Ray administration  applica-
     tions utilize the AIC framework:











SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Standards, Environments, and Macros                        AIC(8)



     ____________________________________________________________________
    |         AIC Client          | use responses |     use defaults    |
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utsetup                     | -a            | -d                  |
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utinstall                   | -A            | -c                  |
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utconfig                    | -a            | -d                  |
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utpolicy                    | -A            | -Z                  |
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utpw                        | -a            | No default available|
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utgroupsig                  | -a            | No default available|
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|
    | utreplica                   | -A            | -D                  |
    |_____________________________|_______________|_____________________|

NOTES
     If a user prompt is needed, when an AIC  client  is  invoked
     non-interactively  (standard  input  is not a terminal), the
     behavior is  not  specified  and  may  change  in  a  future
     release.

SEE ALSO
     utsetup(8), utinstall(8), utconfig(8), utpolicy(8), utpw(8),
     utgroupsig(8), utreplica(8), utdialog_responses.props(5)




























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



Xnewt.8



Sun Ray System Administration                            Xnewt(8)



NAME
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/Xnewt - standalone X server for Sun Ray

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/Xnewt :display [ option ... ]

DESCRIPTION
     Xnewt is a  standalone  X  server  used  only  for  Sun  Ray
     servers.   It  replaces  Xsun as the default Xserver for Sun
     Ray, and it  does  not  support  any  non-Sun  Ray  devices.
     Because  Xnewt  requires  internal  system setup in order to
     start up properly, it should only be invoked internally from
     a Sun Ray startup script.

     Xnewt is based on the release  7.2  of  the  Xorg  Community
     source.   It  is  not  a loadable module system and does not
     depend on the xorg.conf(4) file. Instead,  Xnewt  relies  on
     utxconfig(1)  to  configure  the  server.   Similar to Xorg,
     Xnewt does not provide 8-bit visual support.

OPTIONS
     All the options for Xnewt are  reserved  for  internal  use.
     However, you can configure some Xnewt options using the utx-
     config(1) command.  The available configuration options  are
     described in the utxconfig(1) manual page.

EXTENSIONS
     Xnewt supports the following X extensions:

     RANDR The X Resize  and  Rotate  Extension  (XRandR)  allows
           clients  to change X screens dynamically, for example,
           to change  the  size  and  resolution.  If  a  desktop
           environment  doesn't  provide  a  graphical  tool  for
           interfacing with this functionality,  use  the  xrandr
           command line tool.  This extension is always enabled.

     RENDER
           The X Rendering Extension (Render) allows  clients  to
           use  a new rendering model based on Porter-Duff compo-
           siting. This extension is managed  thru  utxconfig(1).
           Please refer to utxconfig(1) man page for more info.

     GLX   An OpenGL extension to make OpenGL rendering available
           in  the  X window system. Xnewt only provides software
           rendering support since Sun Ray DTUs  do  not  provide
           graphic  hardware  accelerators.   This  extension  is
           always enabled.

     XKB   The X keyboard extension (XKB) extends the ability  to
           control  the  keyboard beyond what is offered by the X
           Window  System  core  protocol.   This  extension   is
           managed    thru   utxconfig(1).    Please   refer   to



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                            Xnewt(8)



           utxconfig(1) man page for more info.

     DPMS  Display Power Management Services (DPMS)  manages  the
           power  supply  of  video monitors on Sun Ray DTUs.  It
           shuts off the monitor to save power after the DTU  has
           been  unused  (idle)  for some time. This extension is
           always enabled.

     XINERAMA
           Xinerama is an extension to the X Window  System  that
           enables   multi-headed   X   applications  and  window
           managers which use two or more  physical  displays  as
           one  large virtual display.  This extension is managed
           thru utxconfig(1).  Please refer to  utxconfig(1)  man
           page for more info.

     XVIDEO
           This extension is a video output mechanism for  the  X
           Window system.  Its main use is to offload part of the
           video processing to the Sun Ray DTU.   This  extension
           is always enabled.


SEE ALSO
     utxconfig(1), Xserver(1)

NOTES
     Xorg is copyrighted software, provided under  licenses  that
     permit  modification and redistribution in source and binary
     form without fee. Xorg is copyrighted  by  numerous  authors
     and  contributors from around the world.  Licensing informa-
     tion can be found at .

     Refer to the source code for specific copyright notices.

     XFree86(TM) is a trademark of The XFree86 Project, Inc.

     X11(TM) and X Window System(TM) are trademarks of  The  Open
     Group.
















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



pam_sunray_hotdesk.8



Standards, Environments, and Macros         pam_sunray_hotdesk(8)



NAME
     pam_sunray_hotdesk - PAM module for use with Sun Ray  Remote
     Hotdesk Authentication

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/pam_sunray_hotdesk.so.1

     /opt/SUNWut/lib64/pam_sunray_hotdesk.so.1

DESCRIPTION
     The pam_sunray_hotdesk module should always  be  present  on
     Display  Manager  PAM  service stacks used by Sun Ray Server
     Software, such as dtlogin-SunRay or gdm.  It is used by  Sun
     Ray software to label sessions as candidates for Remote Hot-
     desk Authentication.  It should appear at the  very  top  of
     the  "auth"  and  "session" stacks, as "requisite".  It does
     not support any other stacks.

     No options are supported

SEE ALSO
     pam.conf(5)

































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                            utadm(8)



NAME
     utadm - Sun Ray network and DHCP configuration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -a interface-name

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -d interface-name

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -f

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -l

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -n

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -p

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -r

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -x

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -A subnetwork

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -D subnetwork

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -L on | off

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -m 6 | 4 | both

DESCRIPTION
     The utadm command manages the network and DHCP configuration
     for a dedicated Sun Ray interconnect or a shared subnet on a
     LAN. It configures the name lookup, host, network,  netmask,
     and  DHCP  database  files  so that Sun Ray DTUs can be con-
     nected to a central server host over  one  or  more  private
     interconnects or shared subnets. One of the following option
     flags must be specified:  -a, -c, -d, -f, -l,  -n,  -p,  -r,
     -x,  -A,  -D,  -L, or -m.  The command is run with superuser
     privileges.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    Configure   the   network   interface   specified   by
           interface-name  as  a  dedicated  interconnect. In the
           default case, an available private address is selected
           from  the range 192.168.128.0 to 192.168.254.0. If the
           subnet selected is 192.168.N.0, entries for the hosts,
           networks,  and  netmasks files are generated using the
           hostname of the server and interface-name:
           File           Entry



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                            utadm(8)



           /etc/hosts     192.168.N.1            hostname-interface-name
           /etc/networks  SunRay-interface-name  192.168.N.0  SunRay
           /etc/netmasks  192.168.N.0            255.255.255.0
     Once the appropriate entries are  established,  the  network
     interface  is  activated  as  hostname-interface-name  using
     ifconfig(1M). If the interface is already up and configured,
     the user will be given the option to bypass configuration of
     the network interface and only configure DHCP on the  inter-
     face. This allows configuration of a Sun Ray interconnect on
     the primary interface of the server. IP addresses on the Sun
     Ray  subnets  are  managed  using  the  DHCP protocol, which
     requires the addition of several macro entries to  the  DHCP
     table to control parameters on Sun Ray subnets. A pool of IP
     addresses for assignment to Sun Ray DTUs is created.  It  is
     possible  to  disable offering IP addresses by entering 0 as
     the first unit address  or entering N to the query to  offer
     IP  addresses  for  the  interface  when  prompted. Once the
     interface  is  configured  and  activated,  utfwadm(1M)   is
     invoked  to  add  the current version of the firmware to the
     DHCP macros for the new network.  The user is  prompted  for
     approval  of all the default options, and may change them as
     desired.  The auth server list is the list of  IP  addresses
     of  Sun  Ray servers.  The value input overrides the default
     value prompted for.  The auth server list can also  be  pro-
     vided  in  a  file  as  a  list of IP addresses separated by
     spaces.

           The -a option implies the -c  option  if  the  initial
           configuration has not yet been performed.

     -c    Initialize the basic configuration files for a Sun Ray
           interconnect  or  shared subnet without setting up any
           networks. This involves making sure that  the  network
           database  files and framework for DHCP exist, and set-
           ting  the  /etc/nsswitch.conf  file  so  that  network
           information  for  the  local  Sun  Ray interconnect or
           shared subnets is obtained from local files.

     -d    Delete the network interface specified  by  interface-
           name  from  the  list  of  configured  Sun Ray private
           interconnects. The specified interface must have  been
           previously configured using the -a option.

     -f    Take this server offline, preventing the  creation  of
           new  sessions on this server when it is within a fail-
           over group. Existing sessions are not killed, but load
           balancing  does  not  select  this server for new ses-
           sions. Note: The GroupManager updates the host  inter-
           face list (if there have been any changes) after every
           keep alive interval. So in order for the changes to be
           effective, the user has to wait at least the keepalive
           time interval.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                            utadm(8)



     -l    Print the current configuration for all  the  Sun  Ray
           dedicated  interconnects  or  shared subnetworks. This
           includes remote subnetworks.

     -n    Bring this server back online.  This  restores  normal
           operation  of the server and allows new sessions to be
           created on this server. Note: The GroupManager updates
           the  host  interface  list  (if  there  have  been any
           changes) after every keep alive interval. So in  order
           for  the changes to be effective, the user has to wait
           at least the keepalive time interval.

     -p    Print the current Sun Ray interconnect  configuration,
           showing for each interface the hostname, network, net-
           mask, and number of IP addresses out of  an  available
           pool of addresses assigned to Sun Ray DTUs by DHCP.

     -r    Unconfigure all active Sun Ray interfaces  and  remove
           all  Sun Ray entries from the configuration databases.
           If LAN connection support is on, will prompt the  user
           if  it  should  be turned off. Default is yes (turn it
           off).

     -x    Print the current configuration in a  machine-readable
           format

     -A    Configure the subnetwork specified as a Sun  Ray  sub-
           network.  This option only configures the DHCP service
           to allocate IP  address  and/or  to  provide  Sun  Ray
           parameters  to Sun ray clients. It also will automati-
           cally turn on  support  for  LAN  connections  from  a
           shared subnetwork.

     -D    Delete the subnetwork specified form the list of  con-
           figured Sun Ray subnetworks.

     -L on| off
           Turn support for LAN connections from a shared subnet-
           work on or off.

     -m 6 | 4 | both
           Set IPv6 and/or IPv4 multicast mode for server commun-
           ications,  and  specify  acceptable  client IP address
           types.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: The following  example  configures  the  Sun  Ray
     private network on hme1

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadm -a hme1





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                            utadm(8)



FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/nsswitch.conf


     Name service switch configuration file.

        o  Solaris: /var/dhcp/dhcptab Linux: /etc/dhcp.conf


     Solaris files or NIS+ table

        o  /etc/inet/hosts

        o  /etc/inet/networks

        o  /etc/inet/netmasks

        o  /etc/hostname.*


     Linux DHCP service configuration files

        o  /etc/sysconfig/dhcpd

        o  /var/lib/dhcp/dhcpd.leases

        o  /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg                 -
           


     Interface information for Red Hat AS 3.0

        o  /etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg - 


     Solaris: Hostname for each interface

     Linux: Interface information for JDS and SuSE

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |        Attribute Value      |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|
    | Availability                |  SUNWuto                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray System Administration                            utadm(8)



SEE ALSO
     Solaris:

     dhtadm(1M),     pntadm(1M),     dhcpconfig(1M),     dhcp(4),
     dhcp_network(4), dhcptab(4), networks(4), netmasks(4)

     Solaris and Linux:

     ifconfig(1M),  syslogd(1M),   syslog(3),   nsswitch.conf(4),
     hosts(4), syslog.conf(4), attributes(5), utfwadm(1M)

     Alexander, S., and Droms, R., DHCP Options and BOOTP  Vendor
     Extensions,  RFC  1533,  Lachman  Technology, Inc., Bucknell
     University, October 1993.

     Droms,  R.,  Dynamic  Host   Configuration   Protocol,   RFC
     1541,Bucknell University, October 1993.






































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5



utadminuser.8



Sun Ray System Administration                      utadminuser(8)



NAME
     utadminuser - Command used to manage authorized user list to
     administer the Sun Ray services through the Admin GUI.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser -a username [ username ... ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser -d username [ username ... ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser -r

DESCRIPTION
     This command is used to  add,  list  and  delete  authorized
     users from the list which is stored in the datastore.

     When invoked without any  option,  it  prints  the  list  of
     authorized users, one name per line.

     The username must be a string consisting of characters  from
     the set of alphabetic characters, numeric characters, period
     (.), underscore (_), and hyphen  (-).  The  first  character
     should be alphabetic.

     When the Administration GUI is configured to use the default
     Sun Ray Datastore Authentication mechanism, only the "admin"
     user is supported and it is added automatically to the  list
     of  authorized  users  by utconfig.  When the Administration
     GUI is configured  to  use  the  Unix  Login  Authentication
     mechanism,  you  can  add  any  valid  Unix  username to the
     authorized user list.

     Only super-user can add and delete entries.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a   Adds specified users to the list

     -d   Deletes specified users from the list

     -r   Removes all authorized users

     -h   Prints the usage

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: List all current authorized users:





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                      utadminuser(8)



     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser

     Example 2: add a specific user "user1" into the list

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser -a user1

     Example 3: removes all authorized users.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utadminuser -r

EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully 1 if error found

SEE ALSO
     useradd(1M), utconfig(1M)








































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utamghadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utamghadm(8)



NAME
     utamghadm - Command used to configure Automated  Multi-Group
     Hotdesking (AMGH), also known as Regional Hotdesking.


SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm -d
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm -l 
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm -s 
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm -x

DESCRIPTION
     This command is used by administrators to configure or  dis-
     able  the  AMGH feature. AMGH can be configured with backend
     implementations  which  are  either  executable  scripts  or
     shared libraries, depending on the site specific implementa-
     tion. This command provides a means to set  the  appropriate
     backend  to  be  used. Setting up the backend implementation
     implicitly enables AMGH.

     The scripts/libraries used to configure AMGH by this command
     must be owned by root only and should not have write permis-
     sions for others or group.

     Only super-user can change  the  AMGH  configurations  using
     this command.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -d   Disable AMGH configurations

     -l   Specify the library to be  used  as  the  AMGH  backend
          implementation.   This  should  be the complete path to
          the library.  32 bit libraries should be  used  for  32
          bit  systems and 64 bit libraries should be used for 64
          bit systems.  For a mixed 32/64 bit group @ISA could be
          used  instead  of  lib/lib64 in the path which would be
          resolved automatically to lib/lib64 on 32/64  bit  sys-
          tems respectively.

     -s   Specify the script to  be  used  as  the  AMGH  backend
          implementation  This should be the complete path to the
          script.

     -h   Prints the usage

     -x   Prints the AMGH parameters in machine  readable  output
          (key/value form).





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utamghadm(8)



EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Display current AMGH configuration

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm

     Example 2: Configure AMGH to use the script  backend  called
     utamghref_script  which  is available in /opt/SUNWutref/amgh
     directory.

     #               /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm                -s
     /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/utamghref_script

     Example 3: Configure AMGH to use the library backend  called
     libutamghref_token.so      which     is     available     in
     /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/lib directory.

     #               /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm                -l
     /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/lib/libutamghref_token.so

     Note: It is available in  /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/lib64  for  64
     bit  linux  systems.   For  a  mixed 32/64 bit group, "@ISA"
     could be used as follows:

     #               /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm                -l
     /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/@ISA/libutamghref_token.so

     The      library      path       will       resolve       to
     /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/lib/libutamghref_token.so  on  a  32 bit
     system  and  /opt/SUNWutref/amgh/lib64/libutamghref_token.so
     on a 64 bit system

     Example 4: Disable AMGH.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utamghadm -d

EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully 1 if error found

SEE ALSO
     ut_amgh_get_server_list(3), ut_amgh_script_interface(3)















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utatiscrub.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utatiscrub(8)



NAME
     utatiscrub - Delete stale imported registrations



SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utatiscrub

DESCRIPTION
     The Sun Ray  Server  Software  Automatic  Token  Importation
     (ATI)  system  utilizes  a  customer-supplied  executable in
     order  to  import  registrations  from  site-external   data
     sources  to  the  Sun Ray Data Store and allow local session
     access when a registered-token policy is in effect.

     In order to remove  such  imported  registrations  when  the
     customer-supplied executable indicates that the token should
     no longer be locally registered, the utatiscrub script  must
     be run.

     This script will iteratively call the customer-supplied exe-
     cutable  for  each  registered token which has been imported
     due to ATI.  If  the  customer-supplied  executable  returns
     "registered=0"  then  the  local registration for that token
     will be deleted.

     This utility can only be invoked with root privileges.

  NOTES AND BEST PRACTICE
     Many customers will want to install this utility into a root
     crontab  so that it is run regularly in order to ensure that
     stale token registrations are removed.

     This utility only needs to be run on a single  member  of  a
     FOG  in  order to remove the registration for the group.  It
     is recommended that it be run on the SRDS primary,  although
     that is not required.

EXIT STATUS
     A 0 exit value indicates that  no  errors  were  encountered
     during processing.

SEE ALSO
     utuser(1m), ut_ati_script_interface(3)











SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utauthd.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utauthd(8)



NAME
     utauthd - Sun Ray DTU authentication daemon.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utauthd  -b | -e   |  -n  |  -s

DESCRIPTION
     The utauthd daemon is  responsible  for  authentication  and
     access  control  for  the Sun Ray DTUs attached to a server.
     This command should not be executed directly. It is  invoked
     by a system startup script.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -b    Begin execution of the daemon.

     -e    End execution of the daemon.

     -n    Number of file descriptors to make available

     -s    Signal to send to utauthd

     Without arguments, the default is -b.

FILES
     The following files are used by the daemon:

        o  /etc/init.d/utsvc


     This is the system startup script that invokes  the  daemon.
     /opt/SUNWut/utsessiond,  the  Session  Manager, performs the
     actual session switching function.

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props


     The Authentication Manager's configuration file.

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/policy/utpolicy


     This file determines what policy is  used  by  the  Sun  Ray
     server.

     To start the authentication manger, it is customary  to  run
     utstart; however, to kill existing user sessions and restart
     services, it is preferable to use utstart -c.

ATTRIBUTES




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                          utauthd(8)



     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     auth.props(5), utpolicy(8), utstart(8)












































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utcapture.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utcapture(8)



NAME
     utcapture - Capture packet information from the  Authentica-
     tion Manager.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcapture   -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcapture [ -r ]  [ -s server ]  [  deskto-
     pID1 desktopID2 ... ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcapture  -i filename

DESCRIPTION
     The utcapture command connects to the Authentication Manager
     and  monitors  latency,  packets  sent,  and packets dropped
     between the Sun Ray server and the Sun Ray DTU's.

     utcapture writes the captured information to stdout  in  the
     following format:

     TERMINALID TIMESTAMP TOTAL PACKET TOTAL LOSS BYTES SENT PER-
     CENT LOSS LATENCY

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -h    Help for using the command.

     -i filename
           Use an input file to search for  Sun  Ray  DTU's  that
           experienced  dropped  packets. A file is created using
           utcapture:

           # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcapture -r > /tmp/filename

           The process is allowed to run for several  minutes  or
           hours. The utcapture command is used again:

           # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcapture -i /tmp/filename

           The output is only the DTU's that experienced  dropped
           packets.

     -r    Write captured data to stdout every 15 seconds in raw,
           continuous format.

     -s server
           Specify the Sun Ray server from which to capture data.
           If  outside  of  the domain of the host running utcap-
           ture, the Sun Ray server hostname must be fully quali-
           fied.  By  default,  the  server monitored is the host
           running utcapture.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utcapture(8)



     When no option is specified, utcapture writes to  stdout  at
     15 second intervals if there is any change in packet loss or
     latency exceeds 10 ms for any Sun Ray DTU.

OPERANDS
     The following operands are supported:

          desktopID
                Capture data for  the  specified  Sun  Ray  DTU's
                only.  Appliances are specified by their Ethernet
                address  (desktopID)  separated  by  spaces.   By
                default, data for all DTU's is displayed.


EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command captures data from  the  Authentica-
     tion  Manager running on localhost every 15 seconds and then
     writes it to stdout if there is any change  in  packet  loss
     for any Sun Ray DTU.

     % utcapture

     Example 2: This command captures data from  the  Authentica-
     tion  Manager running on localhost every 15 seconds and then
     writes it to stdout regardless if there  is  any  change  in
     packet loss.

     % utcapture -r

     Example 3: This command captures data from  the  Authentica-
     tion  Manager  running on netraj118.eng every 15 seconds and
     then writes it to stdout if there is any  change  in  packet
     loss  for DTU's with the Ethernet address of 080020a893cb or
     080020b34231.

     % utcapture -s netraj118.eng 080020a893cb 080020b34231

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Successful completion

     1     Error

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                        utcapture(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utauthd(1M), utdesktop(1M)

NOTES
     utcapture does not report packet  information  for  Sun  Ray
     DTU's using firmware versions of 1.1 or less.

     utcapture does not report latency for Sun  Ray  DTU's  using
     firmware versions of 1.3 or less.

     When using  -r 0.000 will listed for PERCENT LOSS  as  0.000
     for  every interval that has no loss. When not using -r this
     column will be blank. If the output is to  be  processed  by
     commands  that  are  column  oriented,  you must use -r.This
     includes using it as input to utcapture -i.


































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utcard.8



Sun Ray System Administration                           utcard(8)



NAME
     utcard - Sun Ray server smart card configuration utility

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -a filename

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -d name,version

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -l

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -p name,version

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -r name,version,new-position

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcard  -u

DESCRIPTION
     The utcard command allows configuration of  different  types
     of smart cards in the Sun Ray administration database.

     The administrator must first place a configuration file  for
     a specific smartcard in the /etc/opt/SUNWut/smartcard direc-
     tory. This file must have a .cfg  extension.  The  smartcard
     definition  in  the  option.  When a smartcard definition is
     added, it is automatically assigned the last position in the
     probe order.To modify the probe order, use the -r option.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a  filename
           Add the card specified within filename that is in  the
           /etc/opt/SUNWut/smartcard directory

     -d    Delete the card specified with name, version.

     -h    Show usage information

     -l    List all configured cards

     -p    Show the standard properties for  the  card  specified
           with name, version.

     -r    Reorder the card  specified  with  name,  version,  to
           new-position.

     -u    List unconfigured cards available for configuration as
           determined      by      the      .cfg     files     in
           /etc/opt/SUNWut/smartcard




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                           utcard(8)



USAGE
     Use this command only on a Sun Ray server that has been con-
     figured for administration by the utconfig command.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utconfig(1M)







































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utconfig.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utconfig(8)



NAME
     utconfig - Sun Ray server software configuration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utconfig  [ -u ] [ -k ] [-w ] [ -c ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utconfig  [ -a ] [ -d ] [-n ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utconfig command performs initial configuration  of  Sun
     Ray  server, its supporting administration framework as well
     as Windows Connector software. The command prompts the  user
     for  configuration  parameters  for every major component of
     the supporting software packages,  then  configures  it  and
     moves  to  the  next component. The command must be run with
     superuser privileges.

OPTIONS
     The following option is supported.

     -u    Unconfigure the  Sun  Ray  server  and  administration
           software  returning  the mode of operation back to the
           default zero administration mode.

     -k    Configure or unconfigure (with -u) only  the  Sun  Ray
           Kiosk  Mode  software. Using this option requires that
           Sun Ray server and administration  software  has  been
           configured already.

     -w    Configure or unconfigure (with -u) only  the  Sun  Ray
           Web   Administration   software.   Using  this  option
           requires  that  Sun  Ray  server  and   administration
           software has been configured already.

     -c    Configure or unconfigure (with -u) only  the  Sun  Ray
           Windows Connector software. Using this option requires
           that Sun Ray server and  administration  software  has
           been configured already.

     -a    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses                                         from
           /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props.
           If  no  entry  exists for a particular key, prompt the
           user     in     the     standard     fashion.      See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utconfig.

     -d    AIC: Use default responses,  utilizing  defaults  from
           /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_defaults.props.
           If no entry exists for a particular  key,  prompt  the
           user      in     the     standard     fashion.     See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utconfig(8)



           most significant keys affecting utconfig.

     -n    AIC: If required to prompt the  user,  exit  with  bad
           status.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     Packaging related commands.

     utinstall(8), utdialog_responses.props(5), AIC(8)

NOTES
     Note that the responses for Web Server configuration are  in
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRSS.utdialog_responses.props
     rather                                                  than
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props.






























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utcrypto.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utcrypto(8)



NAME
     utcrypto - Sun Ray privacy administration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -a key=value ...

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -d

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -e [-f filename]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -m key=value ...

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -o [-f filename]

DESCRIPTION
     The utcrypto command allows the administrator  to  configure
     privacy  options  for  the  Sun  Ray  server. These settings
     include       upstream/downstream       encryption       and
     upstream/downstream  authentication.   These  settings  will
     affect all sessions.

     utcrypto operations that only display information may be run
     by  any  user. Operations that change or delete data must be
     run as superuser.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    Add the privacy settings  for  all  sessions.  The  -a
           option must be followed by a series of key=value pairs
           separated  by  spaces.   Valid  key=value  pairs   are
           described below. If a key=value pair is not passed in,
           the value for that key will be set to a default value.

           At least one key=value pair must be specified.

     -d    Delete the privacy settings for all sessions.

     -e    Take the privacy settings from stdin  or  a  file  and
           add/modify the settings for all sessions. This will be
           a comma-delimited list of key=value pairs. If  the  -f
           option is specified with a filename, the settings will
           be read from filename.

           To replicate utcrypto settings, run utcrypto -o on the
           "source"  server,  then  use  the  stdout string as an
           argument to utcrypto -e  on  the  "target"  server  or
           servers.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utcrypto(8)



     -f    Specifies a filename for the -e or -o option.

     -h    Displays the usage message.

     -m    Modify a privacy settings for  all  sessions.  The  -m
           option must be followed by a series of key=value pairs
           separated  by  spaces.   Valid  key=value  pairs   are
           described below. If a key=value pair is not passed in,
           the value for that key will remain unchanged.

     -o    Dump all privacy settings in comma-delimited format to
           stdout.  If  followed by the -f option and a filename,
           the settings will be dumped to the file. If  the  file
           specified  by  filename exists, then a warning message
           is generated and the script exits.

           If an asterisk (*) appears in  the  Inherited  column,
           then  no  value pair was specified, so it has been set
           to a hard-coded default value.

           To replicate utcrypto settings, run utcrypto -o on the
           "source"  server,  then  use  the  stdout string as an
           argument to utcrypto -e  on  the  "target"  server  or
           servers.

     The following are valid key=value pairs:

     enc_up_type
           ARCFOUR | none | default

     enc_down_type
           ARCFOUR | none | default

     auth_up_type
           DSA | none | default

     auth_down_type
           simple | none | default

     mode  hard | soft | default

     auth_mode
           hard | soft | default

     The keyword default can be used for all keys  to  unset  the
     value,  so  that  the  default value is used. The hard-coded
     default values are DSA for the auth_up_type  key,  none  for
     the  auth_down_type,  enc_up_type and enc_down_type keys and
     soft for the mode and auth_mode keys.

EXAMPLES




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                         utcrypto(8)



     This adds the configuration for upstream ARCfour  encryption
     and simple downstream authentication.

          Note:  Since enc_down_type  and  auth_up_type  are  not
          specified, they take on the default values:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -a enc_up_type=ARCFOUR auth_down_type=simple

     This  command  modifies  the  default  configuration.   Only
     clients that support DSA upstream authentication get access.

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -m auth_up_type=DSA auth_mode=hard

     This command modifies the  default  configuration.  Upstream
     authentication  is  turned  off and downstream encryption is
     set to ARCfour.

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -m auth_up_type=none enc_down_type=ARCFOUR

     This command removes the default configuration.

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utcrypto -d

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|
























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utdesktop.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utdesktop(8)



NAME
     utdesktop - Sun Ray DTU administration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop                                -a
     "desktopID,location,otherinfo"

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -a   -f filename

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -d desktopID

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -d   -f filename

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop                                -e
     "desktopID,location,otherinfo"

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -e   -f filename

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -l  [  -c  |  -g   |  -w  [  -t
     timeout ]  ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -L   { -c | -w [ -t  timeout  ]
     }

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -l   -i substring

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -o

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop   -p desktopID

DESCRIPTION
     The utdesktop command allows the  user  to  manage  Sun  Ray
     DTU's connected to the Sun Ray server the command is run on.
     The information that utdesktop displays and allows the  user
     to add, edit, or delete is stored in the Sun Ray administra-
     tion database. Other information is obtained  from  the  Sun
     Ray authentication manager.

     utdesktop operations that only display  information  may  be
     run  by  any user. Operations that add, edit, or delete data
     must be run by the superuser.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a desktopID,location,otherinfo
           Add DTU with the specified desktop-ID,  location,  and
           other  information  properties. Note that the 3 comma-
           delimited values should be enclosed within quotes. You
           must be root to use this option.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utdesktop(8)



     -a -f filename
           Batch add multiple DTU's using input from  the  speci-
           fied  filename.  The  format of each line in the input
           file is:  desktop-ID,location,other-info. You must  be
           root to use this option.

     -d desktopID
           Delete the DTU with the specified desktop-ID. You must
           be root to use this option.

     -d -f filename
           Batch delete  multiple  DTU's  using  input  form  the
           specified  filename.   The  format of each line in the
           input file is: desktop-ID. You may use the  output  of
           the  -o  option  to  feed this option as all arguments
           after the first comma are ignored. You must be root to
           use this option.

     -e desktopID,location,otherinfo
           Edit properties for the specified DTU by changing  the
           location  and  other  information  properties  to  the
           specified values.  Note  that  the  3  comma-delimited
           values  should  be enclosed within quotes. You must be
           root to use this option.

     -e -f filename
           Batch edit properties for multiple DTU's  using  input
           from  the  specified filename. The format of each line
           in the input file is:   desktop-id,location,other-info
           You must be root to use this option.

     -h    Show usage information (this message).

     -l    List all DTU's currently registered in the admin data-
           base.

     -l -c List all DTU's that are  currently  connected  to  the
           server (and note any that have been deleted with ques-
           tion marks in the Location field).

     -L -c List all DTU's that are currently connected (long for-
           mat).

     -l -g List all currently connected  DTU's  and  the  servers
           they are connected to.

     -l -w  [-t timeout]
           List all DTU's waiting for a session  during  the  set
           timeout  (short  format).  The  default  value  of the
           timeout is 60 seconds.

     -L -w  [-t timeout]



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                        utdesktop(8)



           List all DTU's waiting for a session  during  the  set
           timeout  (long  format).  The  default  value  of  the
           timeout is 60 seconds.

     -l -i substring
           List all DTU's  with  desktop  IDs  that  contain  the
           specified substring.

     -o    Dump DTU list in comma-delimited format. The format of
           each   line   output   by  this  option  is:  desktop-
           id,location,other-info

     -p    Show desktop properties for the DTU with the specified
           ID.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command clears the location  and  the  other
     information properties for DTU 080020a85112:

     # utdesktop -a "080020a85112,,"

     Example 2: This command changes the location and  the  other
     information  properties for DTU 080020a85112 to "SFO12-2103"
     and "John's Office", respectively:

     # utdesktop -e "080020a85112,SFO12-2103,John's Office"

     Example 3: This command edits  the  properties  of  multiple
     DTU's using input from the file /tmp/desktops:

     # utdesktop -e -f /tmp/desktops

     Example 4: This command  displays  all  DTU's  that  contain
     "a851" in their desktop IDs:

     % utdesktop -l -i a851

     Example 5: This command lists all DTU's in  an  error  state
     without sessions within the default timeout:

     % utdesktop -l -w

     Example 6: For a busy or slow network,  this  command  lists
     (in  long  format)  all DTU's in an error state without ses-
     sions for at least five minutes:

     % utdesktop -L -w -t 300

     Example 7: This command displays the current properties  for
     DTU's 080020a85112:





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                        utdesktop(8)



     % utdesktop -p 080020a85112

FILES
     The following file is used:

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utuser(1M), utadmin.conf(4), the Sun Ray Server Software 4.3
     Administrator's Guide

NOTES
     The -G option has been deprecated. Use the -l -g option pair
     instead.































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utdevadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utdevadm(8)



NAME
     utdevadm - Enable or disable Sun Ray device services.


SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdevadm

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdevadm [ -e | -d ] -s service

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdevadm -h

DESCRIPTION
     The utdevadm command is used to enable/disable Sun Ray  dev-
     ice  services.   This includes USB devices connected through
     USB ports, Embedded  serial  ports  and  Internal  smartcard
     readers on the Sun Ray DTU.

     After Sun Ray Server Software installation, by  default  all
     the  device  services will be enabled.  utdevadm command can
     be used to enable/disable device services only in  the  con-
     figured  mode,  i.e. it is available only after utconfig(1M)
     has been run to activate Sun Ray  data  store.   This  is  a
     site-wide  property.   When configured, it affects all units
     connected to the failover group.

     It is required to do a cold  restart  of  Sun  Ray  services
     before the change can take effect.  When a successful change
     is made, the command reminds the  administrator  to  restart
     services using the following command:
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart -c

     utdevadm command with no  options  or  arguments  shows  the
     current state of the device services.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported:

     -e   Enables specific service.

     -d   Disables specific service.

     -s   Specify a service.
          internal_serial | internal_smartcard_reader | usb | all

          When internal_serial service is  disabled,  users  will
          not  be able to access embedded serial ports on the Sun
          Ray DTU.  Sun Ray 170 has two embedded serial ports.

          When  internal_smartcard_reader  service  is  disabled,
          users  will  not  be  able to access internal smartcard
          reader   through   PC/SC   or   SCF    interface    for
          reading/writing.   It  does  not affect session access,



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utdevadm(8)



          hotdesking using unauthenticated smartcards.

          When usb service is disabled, users will not be able to
          access any devices connected to USB ports.  It does not
          affect HID devices such  as  keyboard,  mouse,  barcode
          reader.

          Specifying all will enable/disable all device services.

     -h   Print the usage.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: The following command shows the current state  of
     the device services.

          # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdevadm

          Sun Ray Device Service         Status
          ------------------------------ ------------
          internal_serial                enabled
          internal_smartcard_reader      enabled
          usb                            enabled

     Example 2: The following command disables usb service.

          # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdevadm -d -s usb

     Example 3: The following command enables usb service.

          # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdevadm -e -s usb

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     None

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0    on success

     1    on error

FILES
     None

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                         utdevadm(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Public Evolving             |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utstart(8), utconfig(8)














































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utdevmgrd.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utdevmgrd(8)



NAME
     utdevmgrd - Sun Ray device manager daemon.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdevmgrd  [ -a authlist ]  [ -c authfile  ]
     [  -d ]  [ -k authprops ]  [ -o optroot ]  [ -p port ]  [ -r
     ]  [ -s sigfile ]  [ -t ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utdevmgrd daemon is responsible  for  brokering  devices
     that  are  attached  to  Sun  Ray  DTU's on the interconnect
     fabric for the purpose of remotely accessing the devices for
     various  services. It is also responsible for approving ser-
     vices, keeping an inventory of devices and their controlling
     services, and locating devices on the interconnect.

     If either the -a or the -c option is specified,  the  device
     manager  daemon  operates  exclusively in call-back mode. In
     this mode, the device manager only communicates to authenti-
     cation  managers  that are explicitly enabled by authlist or
     authfile and that have requested a call-back. The  call-back
     feature provides a mechanism by which the device manager and
     the authentication manager establish each other's identity.

     The optroot directory (default /tmp/SUNWut) is  shared  with
     other  Sun  Ray server components. Primarily it provides the
     location for a compatible device tree for each Sun Ray DTU's
     devices in the sessions and units subdirectories.

     The units subdirectory contains a directory for each DTU  on
     the interconnect named by the DTU's serial number. Within an
     DTU's directory, there are  the  familiar  dev  and  devices
     directories  that  list  logical  names for devices and geo-
     graphically hierarchical names for devices.

     The sessions directory contains symbolic links into the dev-
     ices directory that indicate which sessions are connected to
     which Sun Ray DTU's. The symbolic links are named after  the
     X-Windows  server  display corresponding to a user's session
     by display number only (in other words, after  removing  the
     server  name,  which  is  always a name local to the current
     host, and the screen numbers). The user's  DISPLAY  environ-
     ment  variable  can  then be used to find the devices on the
     'current' DTU. The  user's  UTDEVROOT  environment  variable
     achieves  this,  and  can  be  used to find devices that are
     'currently' accessible. The optroot directory also  includes
     the named pipe with which the device manager communicates to
     device driver services and the session_info directory, which
     contains  user information important to internal workings of
     the device manager.





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utdevmgrd(8)



     The device manager works  within  a  Sun  Ray  server  group
     environment,  which enables rapid switching to other servers
     and user load distribution. In order for device managers  on
     each  server  in  a group to communicate, the device manager
     must gain access to the group signature file. If the  signa-
     ture does not match the one used by other device managers in
     the group, then grouping will fail and not  all  devices  on
     all  DTU's  on  the  interconnect  will  be available on the
     server, including devices on some DTU's being used by  users
     on the server.

     Normally, the device manager finds the group signature  file
     by  looking  into the authentication manager's configuration
     file (/etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props), but this can  be  changed
     by  using  the  -s  and -k options. If -s is specified, then
     sigfile is read and used as the group signature.  If  -k  is
     specified, then the authprops file is scanned for the gmSig-
     natureFile key and the listed file is  used  for  the  group
     signature.

     Error messages from utdevmgrd are  logged  using  syslog(3),
     with a facility value of LOG_DAEMON.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a authlist
           Add the host and port pairs specified in  authlist  to
           the  list of allowed authentication managers. The for-
           mat  of  authlist  is  a  comma  separated   list   of
           hostname:port pairs.

     -c authfile
           Add the host and port pairs  specified  in  the  ASCII
           file  authfile  to  the list of allowed authentication
           managers. The file contains a list  of  authentication
           manager  specifications,  one per line. The specifica-
           tions take the  form  of  hostname  followed  by  port
           number,  separated by white space. Blank lines and any
           line whose first  printable  character  is  ``#''  are
           ignored.

     -d    Enable debugging output.

     -k authprops
           Set the location for the authentication manager's con-
           figuration  file  to  authprops.  This file is used to
           find the group signature file in case the sigfile  key
           was  not  specified. The default for this parameter is
           /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props. The key in this file  that
           specifies the group signature is gmSignatureFile.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                        utdevmgrd(8)



     -o optroot
           Set the device information root directory to  optroot.
           This  directory  contains  the service named pipe, and
           the units,  sessions,  and  session_info  directories.
           optroot  is generally shared with other Sun Ray server
           components.

     -p port
           Set the device manager's listen port to the  specified
           port  value. The device manager defaults to port 7011.
           This is the port by which device services and  authen-
           tication managers contact the device manager.

     -r    Automatically restart the device manager daemon if  it
           exits.  With  this  option,  the device manager daemon
           creates two processes: a child that performs  all  the
           actual  work  and  a  parent  monitoring  process. The
           parent process will restart a child  if  the  previous
           one exits. This enables existing services to re-attach
           to a new child device manager.

     -s sigfile
           Set the path of the group signature file to sigfile.

     -t    Test mode. Relax checking for error returns for  files
           that   are  root  access.  Could  cause  unpredictable
           results on an operational device manager  in  case  of
           true failure.

FILES
     The following files are used:

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.permit
           The customary location of the authfile for a system.

     /tmp/SUNWut
           The customary location for temporary files used by Sun
           Ray enterprise server managers, designated by optroot.

     /tmp/SUNWut/.utdevmgr
           The named pipe used for communication between the dev-
           ice manager and device driver services.

     /tmp/SUNWut/units
           The directory containing device directories  for  each
           DTU.  The  directory  names are after the DTU's serial
           numbers. Each directory contains a dev directory and a
           devices directory.

     /tmp/SUNWut/sessions
           The directory containing links to DTU's in  the  units
           directory,  named by X-Windows display number for each



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                        utdevmgrd(8)



           session. These links change as users move from one Sun
           Ray DTU to another.

     /tmp/SUNWut/session_info
           The directory containing information internal  to  the
           device manager for handling session mobility.

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props
           The customary location of the authprops file  contain-
           ing  the  authentication  manager settings. The device
           manager looks for the gmSignatureFile key  to  extract
           the location of the group signature file.

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/gmSignature
           The customary location of the sigfile file  containing
           the group signature.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     The following environment variables are used:

     DISPLAY
           Use to get the default X-Windows display  number  from
           within the user's environment.

     UTDEVROOT
           Use to get the devices for the  current  session  from
           within the user's environment.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utauthd(1M), syslog(3), syslogd(1M), syslog.conf(4)















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utdssync.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utdssync(8)



NAME
     utdssync - Converts and synchronizes Sun Ray datastore  ser-
     vice port.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdssync  [ -v ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utdssync command converts the Sun Ray datastore  service
     port  on  the  primary  datastore server to the default port
     7012. It also synchronizes all the secondary servers to  use
     the same port number.

     utdssync is intended for use after software upgrades to  Sun
     Ray  Server Software 3.0 (SRSS 3) have been completed on all
     the servers within the data sharing group.

          Note:

          The command must be run with  superuser  privileges  on
          the primary datastore server.

OPTIONS
     The following option is supported.

     -v    verbose mode

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utreplica(1M), utrcmd(1M), utinstall(1M)
















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utfwadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



NAME
     utfwadm - Sun Ray DTU firmware version management.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwadm  -A  { -a |  -e  enetAddr  }  [  -f
     firmware  ]  [  -G { hashed-password | prompt | off | none |
     force } ] [ -g { hashed-password | prompt |  off  |  none  |
     force  }  ] { -n intf | -N subnetwork | -V } [ -d ] [ -F ] [
     -u ] [ -i filename ] ...

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwadm  -D  {  -a  |  -e  enetAddr}  {  -n
     interface | -N subnetwork | -V }  ...

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwadm   -P [ -V ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwadm   -R

DESCRIPTION
     The utfwadm command manages firmware  upgrades  to  Sun  Ray
     DTUs.  The DTUs are capable of loading firmware upgrades and
     programming new firmware into their flash  PROM  (Programmed
     Read-Only Memory).

     When a DTU is powered on, the firmware obtains an IP address
     and other configuration information using the DHCP protocol.
     Part of the configuration information is a firmware  version
     identifier.  If  this  identifier  does  not match the DTU's
     existing  firmware,  the  DTU  initiates  an  upgrade  which
     replaces the current firmware with the new version.

     The utfwadm command must be run when a new firmware  version
     is  installed  to update the firmware version identifier and
     force the DTUs to load the new version on their  next  power
     cycle.  utfwadm  allows  firmware  identifiers  to be set on
     either a per-network or  per-unit  basis  enabling  firmware
     upgrades  to  be  targeted  at entire Sun Ray subnetworks or
     individual DTUs.

     In the SRSS 3.1 release, a new mechanism has been introduced
     to  manage firmware without using DHCP alone. With increased
     deployment of Sun Rays remote from their servers, it  became
     difficult  to  supply DHCP parameters from the server to the
     Sun Ray. Thus, a  different  mechanism  that  uses  TFTP  to
     access  a firmware configuration file on the firmware server
     was developed.  This  mechanism  involves  the  creation  of
     Model.parms  or  Model..parms  files  for  the firmware
     files  corresponding  to   each   Sun   Ray   Model   (e.g.,
     ``CoronaP1'')  that utfwadm installs in the /tftpboot direc-
     tory. The files containing   are  unit-specific,  where
      is the value defined using the -e option.





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



     The modifications to utfwadm to support this have been made,
     and  a  few  additional options have been defined to support
     control of firmware downloads through the creation of  these
     configuration  files.  These  options allow the forcing of a
     firmware downgrade where that would normally  be  prevented,
     the  generation  of only these files, without updating DHCP,
     the use of the frame buffer to hold the downloaded  firmware
     file, and the inclusion of an additional file that specifies
     parameters other than firmware related ones, such as a  list
     of servers to choose from.

     It is possible to determine the firmware versions  that  are
     available  and  in  use  by  each  Sun  Ray connected to the
     current server. See the utfwload(1M) command.

        o  In the /tftpboot directory are the firmware files.  To
           verify the version of a firmware file, type:


     /opt/SUNWut/lib/lzd < /tftpboot/firmware-filename | what

        o  To identify the version of the firmware that a partic-
           ular connected Sun Ray DTU is using, type:

           /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdesktop -p desktopID


     Where desktopID is the full MAC address. To display the  MAC
     address,  press the three audio keys on the Sun Ray DTU key-
     board simultaneously.

     Any Sun Ray subnetworks specified must have been  previously
     set up using the utadm(1M) command. However, such configura-
     tion is no longer necessary for  firmware  maintenance  when
     .parms  files  are  used.  (See  the  -V option below.)  The
     utfwadm command must be run under super-user privileges.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -A    Add a unit  or  units  to  the  list  of  DTUs  to  be
           upgraded.   The  -A  option must be followed by either
           the -a or -e suboption.

     -D    Remove the defined DTUs from the list of units  to  be
           upgraded.  This  option  causes  the  firmware version
           identifier to be unset.  The -D option  must  be  fol-
           lowed by either the -a or -e suboption.

     -a    Add or delete all units from the list of  DTUs  to  be
           upgraded.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



     -e enetAddr
           Apply the operation to only the  specified  unit  with
           Ethernet  address given by enetAddr, where all six hex
           bytes of the address are specified.

     -f firmware
           This option gives the pathname for the firmware to  be
           downloaded  to the DTUs. If firmware refers to a file,
           the hardware version is  extracted  from  the  version
           string  within the file, and the file is copied to the
           /tftpboot directory to be downloaded only to that ver-
           sion  of  the hardware. If firmware refers to a direc-
           tory, then all files in the directory  are  copied  to
           the  /tftpboot  directory  with  their version strings
           appended. If the -f option is  not  given,  a  default
           location is used.

           The 4.0 release of Sun  Ray  firmware  introduced  two
           varieties  of  firmware:  one  that  supported limited
           local configuration of the Sun Ray, and one  that  did
           not.  The  default  was to install the so-called "non-
           GUI" firmware, while the  "GUI"  firmware  (supporting
           the  local  configuration)  was  installed  using  "-f
           /opt/SUNWut/lib/firmware_gui".

           In the 4.3 release, these two versions  are  collapsed
           back  into a single version, and a different mechanism
           for enabling the GUI capability is provided.  See  the
           -G and -g options explained below.

     -N subnetwork
           Apply the  given operation to units  attached  on  the
           specified  subnetwork.   Multiple  subnetworks  may be
           given.  It can also specify the special keyword all to
           apply  the operation to all configured Sun Ray subnet-
           works.

     -N all
           Apply the  given operation to all subnetworks.

     -n intf
           Apply the given operation to units  connected  to  the
           Ethernet  interface  intf.  Multiple interfaces may be
           given, or the special keyword all, which  applies  the
           operation to all configured Sun Ray interfaces.

     -V    With -A, generate the .parms files, but do not  update
           DHCP.   Note  that  this  option should not be used if
           DHCP is still being used to provide  firmware  parame-
           ters  to  DTUs  with old firmware.  With -P, include a
           listing of the versions specified in the .parms files.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



     -F    Force the Sun Rays to  download  this  firmware,  even
           though  the barrier for this firmware is less than the
           barrier defined  in  the  current  firmware.  This  is
           accomplished by adding a BarrierLevel=barrier value to
           the .parms file. This is  equivalent  to  setting  the
           BarrierLevel DHCP vendor option.

     -u    Turn on firmware load through the frame  buffer.  This
           is  primarily for debugging purposes, to show the pro-
           gression of the firmware loading process.

     -i parmfile
           Include the values contained in parmfile at the end of
           the  .parms  file  for each firmware model.  This file
           contains a set of key/value pairs that replace most of
           the parameters that would have previously been config-
           ured using DHCP.  These values are  not  saved  across
           successive  invocations  of this command, so to retain
           them, the -i option must be specified each  time.  The
           list of key/value pairs is described below.

     -G,-g control
           These options are used to control the contents of  the
           enablegui  and disablegui entries in the .parms files.
           These entries are used to  control  the  circumstances
           under  which  the local configuration GUI on a Sun Ray
           may be  enabled  or  disabled.  In  the  case  of  the
           hashed-password  and  prompt  values  of  the  control
           option, enabling or disabling the GUI feature must  be
           accompanied by the entry of a password on the Sun Ray.
           Except for the prompt option, which reads the value of
           a  password  on the standard input of the program, and
           substitutes a hashed version  of  that  password,  the
           value  of  the  control  option  is  assigned  to  the
           corresponding .parms file keyword.  The  uthashpwd(1M)
           program  must  be used to create the hashed version of
           the password from  the  clear  text  version,  and  is
           invoked  by utfwadm when prompt is specified.  See the
           description below of how these .parms file entries are
           interpreted.   Only  one of -G or -g can have force as
           the value of control. When force is given for  one  of
           the options, it fixes the value of the other as off.

           In addition to setting the values of the  .parms  file
           entries,  there  are two control files included in the
           firmware  directory  that  may  be  installed  in  the
           /tftpboot    directory.    These   files   are   named
           SunRay.enableGUI  and   SunRay.disableGUI,   and   are
           required  by  the  firmware to be present and readable
           when the GUI is either enabled  or  disabled,  respec-
           tively.  They  can  be thought of as keys that must be
           used to turn a lock. If the value  of  the  -G  or  -g



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



           option  is  not  off, the corresponding file is copied
           over as part of the firmware installation.

     -d    Explicitly  disable  firmware  download  by   creating
           .parms  files  with version=_NONE_, used with -A. This
           is different from -D which removes  the  .parms  files
           completely.  This  is most useful with -e to prevent a
           particular Sun Ray from being upgraded. It also  makes
           sense  to  use  this  to disable firmware upgrade com-
           pletely, but  provide  a  server  list  using  the  -i
           option.

     -n all
           Apply the  given operation to all interfaces.

     -P    This variant of the command prints out the version  to
           which each domain should be upgraded on the next power
           cycle. A domain may be either an  interconnect  subnet
           or  individual  DTU.  If it is a subnet, then the Intf
           column lists the interface device. If it is an indivi-
           dual  DTU,  then  its Ethernet address is given in the
           Domain column, and the Intf column contains the inter-
           face  name.  If -V is specified, the versions from the
           .parms files are printed.

     -R    Remove the firmware files that were  copied  into  the
           boot directory.

     The -z option is RESERVED for use  by  the  Sun  Ray  server
     software and should not be used.

     The key/value pairs included in the parmfile  supplied  with
     the  -i  option  are  of the form "=", with case
     sensitivity and no spaces allowed. Options which take values
     of  0  or  1 have a default value of 0 if not specified. The
     values of the parameters below can be  examined  by  viewing
     the  contents  of  the various /tftpboot/*.parms files.  The
     following options are allowed:

     servers=
           specifies a comma-separated mixture  hostnames  and/or
           IP addresses. This is a generalization and replacement
           for the AltAuth list.

     select=
           allows either inorder or random, and selects a  server
           from the server list either starting at the beginning,
           or at random, respectively.

     MTU=  sets the network MTU. The value used is the minimum of
           those supplied from various sources.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



     LogXXX=
           sets the logging level for various classes of  logging
           events,  where  XXX  is one of Appl, Vid, USB, Net, or
           Kern. These correspond to the equivalent  DHCP  vendor
           options.

     LogHost=
           is a dotted-decimal IP address  used  as  the  logging
           host,  equivalent  to  the  corresponding  DHCP vendor
           option.

     bandwidth=
           sets the bandwidth limit used by the Sun Ray, in  bits
           per second.

     compress={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, forces compression on.

     lossless={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, does not permit lossy compression to be
           used.

     stopqon={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, enables the STOP-Q key sequence  to  be
           used to disconnect a Sun Ray from a server, in partic-
           ular, if it's using a VPN connection.

     utloadoff={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, disables the ability to use the  utload
           program to force a Sun Ray to load firmware.

     fulldup={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, forces the network port  connection  to
           be  full  duplex.   This is to aid in situations where
           switch ports are not set to autonegotiation mode.

     kbcountry=code
           forces the keyboard country code number for a non-U.S.
           keyboard  that reports a country code value of 0. This
           value can also be set using the Advanced menu  of  the
           Sun  Ray  configuration  GUI. Some possible values for
           the country code, from USB keyboard maps, are:
                6    Danish
                7    Finnish
                8    French
                9    German
                14   Italian
                15   Roman/Kana
                16   Korean
                18   Dutch
                19   Norwegian
                22   Portugese



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          6






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



                25   Spanish
                26   Swedish
                27   Swiss French
                28   Swiss German
                30   Taiwanese
                32   UK English
                33   U.S. English
           For a current list of configured keyboards on Solaris,
           consult  the  keytable.map file, which can be found in
           the /usr/openwin subtree.

     fastload={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, forces the use of  a  larger  blocksize
           for TFTP transfers, if supported by the TFTP server.

     videoindisable={ 0 | 1 }
           when set to 1, turns off the input source on the front
           of  a Sun Ray 270, and locks the monitor into display-
           ing only the Sun Ray output.

     poweroff=
           sets how much time a Sun Ray 3 Series Client  will  be
           idle  before it turns off.  The default power off time
           is 30 minutes. Setting poweroff=0 disables  the  power
           off  feature.  When  the power off feature is enabled,
           the firmware enforces a minimum power off value of  10
           minutes  and a maximum power off value of 30 days. The
           value for the power off feature is in minutes.

     stopkeys={ key1-key2[-keyn}* | none }
           where keyn is chosen from the  set  of  modifier  keys
           ctrl,  shift,  alt, and meta. This option specifies an
           alternative combination of modifier keys that  behaves
           the  same  as the STOP key on the Sun keyboard. If set
           to none, the alternative key combination is  disabled.
           The  default  value if this keyword is not present, is
           the set of all four modifier keys. (The "Meta" key has
           different  names  on different keyboards: on a PC key-
           board, it is the "Windows" key, and on a Mac keyboard,
           it is the "Program" key.)

     cmdcachesize=size
           gives the size, in Kbytes, of the command cache  look-
           back  buffer.  This  area  is  used to store a list of
           recent commands. When the server finds  a  command  or
           series  of commands in this buffer, it sends a command
           that tells the Sun Ray to replay these  commands  from
           the buffer, rather than sending the commands verbatim.
           The default value is 512 Kbytes. It can  also  be  set
           from the Advanced submenu of the Sun Ray GUI.

     enablegui= { hashed-password | off | none | force }



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          7






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



     disablegui= { hashed-password | off | none | force }
           where these two keywords control the enabling or disa-
           bling of the Sun Ray's local configuration GUI. If the
           value is a hashed-password produced as the  output  of
           the  uthashpwd(1M)  command,  then  the  corresponding
           password must be entered on  the  Sun  Ray's  keyboard
           before  the  GUI  can  be  enabled or disabled. If the
           value is none, then no password is  required,  if  off
           then  the  enable  or  disable  is  disallowed, and if
           force, then the Sun Ray will attempt to turn  the  GUI
           on  or  off.  If both values are set to force, the GUI
           will remain in its current state. Be very careful when
           setting  disablegui to force (-g force), as this could
           disable the GUI on a Sun Ray that requires the use  of
           a local configuration for correct operation.

           In all cases, any attempt to transition from one state
           to  another succeeds only if the corresponding control
           file (SunRay.enableGUI or  SunRay.disableGUI)  can  be
           read  from the current firmware server, and its signa-
           ture verified. If there is no password set, the utload
           command may be used to force the loading of the enable
           or disable file, which will enable or disable the GUI,
           as long as the value of utloadoff is not 1.

           The prompt to enable the GUI, and for the password  if
           required,  will  be  done  when there is an attempt to
           bring up the GUI menu (STOP-M or STOP-S) and  the  GUI
           is  disabled. For disabling, there is a menu selection
           in the STOP-C menu to disable the GUI.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/dhcpd.conf


     File or NIS+ table

        o  /tftpboot


     Default location of firmware boot file

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          8






Sun Ray System Administration                          utfwadm(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     dhcpd.conf(5),  dhcpd(8),   dhcpd.leases(5),   dhcp-options,
     what(P), utadm(8), utdesktop(8), utquery(8), uthashpwd(1M)














































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          9



utfwload.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utfwload(8)



NAME
     utfwload -  Provide  a  compact  summary  of  sessions   and
     firmware maintenance.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwload   [ -a ]  [ -l ]  [ -L ] [ -H ]

DESCRIPTION
     Without an  argument,  the  utfwload  command  provides  the
     display  number  of the  current session  for each connected
     Sun Ray in use,  as well as the logged-in user, IP  address,
     Model,  MAC  address,  and firmware  revision level. Options
     allow  forcing  the download of firmware to  Sun  Rays  that
     are  not  running the current  version  supplied  by the Sun
     Ray server.

          Note:

          utfwload upgrades Sun Rays that have been  loaded  with
          firmware  from the SRSS 2.0 114880-04 patch or later or
          from SRSS  3.0  only.  This  command  cannot  force  an
          upgrade of earlier firmware.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    In combination with other options, this  option   con-
           trols   the  selection   of  Sun  Rays  or sessions to
           display. Without-a , only sessions that have logged in
           users are displayed. With -a, all sessions or Sun Rays
           are displayed, and those with no logged in user have a
           user id field of "????".

     -l,-L With utfwload, force Sun Rays that are   not   running
           the  version  of   firmware   installed on the current
           server to upgrade. The command compares  the   "System
           Version"   as  provided by running utfwadm -P with the
           value that would be displayed with no option  or  with
           utfwload -a. If  the  version is different, a download
           is forced. The -l form of the command  forces  loading
           only  on  Sun  Rays   that are connected  to  sessions
           with no user logged in, while the  -L  form  forces  a
           download  on  all Sun Rays that  are out of date. This
           option  is  available  only   to   users   with   root
           privileges.

     -H    Output column headings above the regular output.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utfwload(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utwho(1M), attributes(5)















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utfwsync.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utfwsync(8)



NAME
     utfwsync - Synchronizes Sun Ray DTU firmware downloads.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwsync  [ -d ]  [ -v ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utfwsync command refreshes the firmware level on the Sun
     Ray  DTUs  (DTUs)  with the default firmware version for the
     current Sun Ray Server Softrware release and patch level. It
     then  forces  all the Sun Ray DTUs connected to that Sun Ray
     server to restart. If the Sun Ray server is part of a  fail-
     over  group, then all Sun Ray DTUs within the failover group
     are forced to restart. The result is that each DTU tries  to
     download  the latest firmware offered by the primary Sun Ray
     server as it restarts, as described  in  the  utfwadm(1M)man
     page.

     This command is intended for use after software upgrades  or
     after  new  firmware has been installed on all hosts as part
     of a patch.

     As the command executes, access to user sessions  is  inter-
     rupted, but the sessions are not lost and are returned after
     the command completes.

     The command must be run with superuser privileges.

OPTIONS
     The following option is supported.

     -d    Disables system reconfiguration and  forces  all  con-
           nected  DTUs  to load the currently configured version
           of the firmware. The currently configured  version  of
           the firmware may or may not be the default version for
           the current release and patch level.

     -v    Verbose mode. Additional messages  regarding  what  is
           being done are written to stdout.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utfwsync(8)



     utgstatus(1M), utauthd(1M), utfwadm(1M), utinstall(1M)






















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utgmtarget.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utgmtarget(8)



NAME
     utgmtarget - manage a group-wide list of  explicit  destina-
     tions for Sun Ray group membership announcements

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgmtarget

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgmtarget -a host ...

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgmtarget -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgmtarget -d host ...

DESCRIPTION
     The utgmtarget command is used to designate a collection  of
     Sun Ray servers as explicit targets of Sun Ray group member-
     ship announcements.

     Sun Ray group membership announcements are usually  sent  as
     multicast or broadcast announcements, according to the value
     of the enableMulticast property in the  auth.props(5)  file.
     On  networks that disallow multicasts or broadcasts, or that
     do not provide dependable multicast or broadcast service, it
     is  possible  that  these  announcements  will not reach the
     other servers in the intended Sun Ray host group.   On  such
     networks  the  host group will not form or will sporadically
     become  partitioned.   utgmtarget  allows  group  membership
     announcements  to  be  sent  as  unicast traffic to specific
     hosts, allowing the group to form and remain stable  despite
     problematic multicast or broadcast propagation.

     Unicast announcements, when configured, are sent in addition
     to  multicast  or  broadcast announcements.  If your network
     provides reasonable multicast or broadcast service then uni-
     cast announcements are unnecessary.

     utgmtarget maintains a group-wide list of  unicast  targets.
     The  list is held in the Sun Ray group-wide data store.  All
     servers that have been configured (by utreplica(8)) to share
     the data store will see, and will send unicast announcements
     to, the identical list of target servers.  A per-server list
     of   unicast   targets  may  be  defined  in  each  server's
     auth.props(5) file.  If both  a  group-wide  and  per-server
     target  list  are  defined then the server will send unicast
     announcements to both lists.
          Note:

          After the target list has been modified, a  restart  of
          Sun  Ray services must be performed to put the new con-
          figuration into operation.





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                       utgmtarget(8)



     When invoked with no options utgmtarget  shows  the  current
     group-wide unicast target list.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a host ...
           Adds the specified hosts to  the  group-wide  list  of
           unicast group announcement targets.

     -c    Clears (deletes all hosts from) the group-wide list of
           unicast group announcement targets.

     -d host ...
           Deletes the specified hosts from the  group-wide  list
           of unicast group announcement targets.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command adds servers "fred" and  "wilma"  to
     the group-wide list of unicast group announcement targets:

     # utgmtarget -a fred wilma

     After the next Sun Ray  service  restart  servers  fred  and
     wilma  will  be sent individual unicast copies of each group
     announcement that this Sun Ray server sends to the multicast
     or broadcast address.

     Example 2: This command removes all group-wide unicast group
     announcement targets:

     # utgmtarget -c

     After the next Sun Ray  service  restart  no  unicast  group
     announcements  will  be  transmitted  by this Sun Ray server
     (unless a per-host target list exists on this  server).   It
     will continue to send multicast or broadcast announcements.

EXIT STATUS
     The utgmtarget command reports 0  on  success,  non-zero  on
     failure.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                       utgmtarget(8)



SEE ALSO
     utstart(8),   utconfig(8),    utreplica(8),    utgstatus(8),
     auth.props(5)

NOTES
     utgmtarget is available only after utconfig(8) has been  run
     to activate the Sun Ray data store.

     The number of unicast targets that may  be  present  in  the
     group-wide target list at any one time may be limited by the
     implementation.   This  implementation  guarantees  that  at
     least 100 targets will be supported at one time.  It is pos-
     sible that more than 100 targets may be configured  in  some
     circumstances  but a site should not depend on being able to
     exceed 100 in future SRSS releases.








































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utgroupsig.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utgroupsig(8)



NAME
     utgroupsig - Sets the group signature for Sun Ray servers in
     a failover group.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgroupsig [-a [-n]]

DESCRIPTION
     The utgroupsig command sets the failover group signature.

     When run interactively, the utgroupsig command  prompts  for
     the new signature twice. The group signature file must be at
     least 8 bytes long and has similar content diversity charac-
     teristics as required by passwd(1).

     When  run  non-interactively  without  options,   utgroupsig
     accepts a signature from standard input.

     If any AIC options are specified,  when  utgroupsig  is  run
     non-interactively, behavior is as described in AIC(8).

     The signature is stored in clear in the  location  specified
     in  the  auth.props  file with the gmSignatureFile property.
     The group signature file is created with owner root and mode
     600 (read-write by root).

     Upon successful input, utgroupsig stores  the  signature  in
     the /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props
     file using the key "utgroupsig.Signature".

OPTIONS
     -a    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses                                         from
           /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props.
           If  no  entry  exists for a particular key, prompt the
           user     in     the     standard     fashion.      See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utgroupsig.

     -n    AIC: If required to prompt the  user,  exit  with  bad
           status.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/gmSignature


     Sun Ray group signature default file.

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                       utgroupsig(8)



     Sun Ray authentication properties file.

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Invalid input to command.

     2     Unexpected failure. Signature file unchanged.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     AIC(8),  utdialog_responses.props(5),   AIC(8),   utrcmd(8),
     passwd(8), auth.props(5)































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utgstatus.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utgstatus(8)



NAME
     utgstatus - Display failover group status.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgstatus  [ -s server ]  [ -v ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utgstatus command allows the user to view  the  failover
     group  status  information  for  the local server or for the
     named server. The information that the command  displays  is
     specific to that server at the time the command is run.

     utgstatus displays information only and so can be run by any
     user.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -s server
           Display all the failover group status information  for
           the specified server.

     -v    Display all  the  failover  group  status  information
           vertically.  This is especially useful when displaying
           IPv6 addresses.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command displays the failover  group  status
     for the local Sun Ray server

     % /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgstatus

     Example 2: This command displays the failover  group  status
     for the server sunray3:

     % /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utgstatus -s sunray3

     Information returned from this command looks like  the  fol-
     lowing for a typical LAN-based configuration:

     Or like this for a typical interconnect-based configuration:

      host     flags    interface     flags
                        192.24.0.0/24
      --------------    -------------------
      sunray3     TN    192.24.0.136  UAM
      sunray1     T-    192.24.0.93   UA-
      sunray2     TN    192.24.0.95   UAM
      sunray-sras TN    192.24.0.96   U--

     For proper viewing, make sure the window is wide enough.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utgstatus(8)



     Explanation of utgstatus information:

     The Network/Netmask values are denoted  in  CIDR  (Classless
     Inter  Domain  Routing)  network address notation, where the
     initial value (192.24.0.0) is the network address itself and
     the  '/24'  suffix signifies the number of bits that are the
     network identifier of the address. The remaining 8 bits  are
     for specific host addresses.

     Host Status Flags


           T     Trusted - The trusted hosts are members of  this
                 failover group because they share the same group
                 signature. As of the SRSS 4.0 release, the  pro-
                 cessing  of  failover  group  messages  has been
                 changed.  Messages  from  hosts  that  are   not
                 trusted  are  discarded  and  ignored,  as these
                 present  a  possible  Denial-of-Service  attack.
                 Thus,  only  host entries for trusted hosts will
                 be printed by this command.

           N     oNline - The server is configured to participate
                 in  load balancing (see the utadm man page for a
                 description of the -n option).


     Interface Status Flags


           U     Up - The interface  is  currently  reachable  by
                 this host.

           A     Available - The interface is available  for  Sun
                 Rays to connect to it and get service.

           M     Managing - The interface is configured to manage
                 Sun  Rays  on  its local subnet (in other words,
                 utadm -a was run to configure the interface  for
                 Sun Ray service).

     In the first example above, all hosts are part of  the  same
     failover  group.  All  hosts but sunray1 are "online", which
     means they will participate in creating  in  normal  session
     creation. sunray1 is "offline", which means it will not par-
     ticipate in session creation during load balancing for  this
     failover  group,  although  sessions can still be created on
     it,  either  explicitly  through  the  use  of  utswitch  or
     utselect  -R,  or  implicitly if all other servers are down.
     The LAN interfaces for all of the hosts are Up, and all  but
     sunray-sras  are  Available to Sun Rays (sunray-sras did not
     have utadm -a run to configure its  interface  for  Sun  Ray



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                        utgstatus(8)



     service,  and  it does not have allowLANConnections=true set
     in auth.props. It is a dedicated SRAS server for  the  fail-
     over group). Both sunray2 and sunray3 are Managing Sun Rays,
     because utadm -a was run for their LAN interfaces. They will
     offer  DHCP parameters and possibly addresses during the Sun
     Ray bootup phase for Sun Rays on their local subnets.

     In the second example above, all of the  hosts  are  Trusted
     and  Online, meaning that they will all participate in fail-
     over and load  balancing  for  their  Available  interfaces.
     193.25.0.0/24 is the LAN network, and the other networks are
     Sun Ray interconnects. All of the  LAN  interfaces  are  Up,
     meaning  that they are reachable, but none are Available for
     Sun Ray service, and none are Managing Sun Rays on the local
     subnet. All of the interconnect interfaces are Up and Avail-
     able, and all are Managing Sun Rays.

SEE ALSO
     utadm, auth.props, utswtich, utselect

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|



























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



uthashpwd.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        uthashpwd(8)



NAME
     uthashpwd - create a hashed version of a password

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/uthashpwd

DESCRIPTION
     This program reads a  password  string  on  standard  input,
     applies  a  one-way  hash  function and writes the result on
     standard output, as a printable string.

     This hashed password is used in order  to  authenticate  the
     enabling or disabling of the GUI configuration capability of
     a Sun Ray. As such, the same hash function is implemented in
     the  firmware  when a password is entered, and the result is
     compared with the hashed version that was transferred to the
     Sun Ray from the server.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utfwadm(1M)

























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



uthotdesk.8



Standards, Environments, and Macros                  uthotdesk(8)



NAME
     uthotdesk - PAM service name  for  Sun  Ray  Remote  Hotdesk
     Authentication

SYNOPSIS
     uthotdesk

DESCRIPTION
     The uthotdesk PAM service  can  be  used  to  configure  the
     authentication,  account  management, and password stacks to
     be used when reconnecting to a  logged-in  Sun  Ray  session
     (aka  hotdesking)  via  the  Remote  Hotdesk  Authentication
     interface.

     No options are supported

SEE ALSO
     pam.conf(5)





































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utinstall.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utinstall(8)



NAME
     utinstall - Sun  Ray  Software  installation,  upgrade,  and
     removal utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /cdrom/cdrom0/utinstall [ -a admin-file ]  [ -d media-dir  ]
     [ -u ]  [ -j jre ]

     /cdrom/cdrom0/utinstall [ -A ]   [  -c  ]   [  -n  ]   [  -D
     dialog_dir ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utinstall [ -a admin-file ]  [ -d media-dir
     ]  [ -u ]  [ -j jre ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utinstall command installs, upgrades,  and  removes  Sun
     Ray  Software  including Sun Ray Server Software and Sun Ray
     Windows Connector.  All software required to support the Sun
     Ray server is installed.

     The utinstall command is run under superuser privileges  and
     prompts  the  user  before  taking  any  action.  The use of
     defaults is recommended.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -d media-dir
           Instead of the default, use media-dir as the installa-
           tion media root directory.

     -j jre
           Instead of the default, use the particular jre  speci-
           fied in the argument.

     -u    Remove previously installed Sun Ray Software.

     -A    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses                                         from
           /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRSS.utdialog_responses.props.
           If  no  entry  exists for a particular key, prompt the
           user     in     the     standard     fashion.      See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utinstall.

     -c    AIC: Use default responses,  utilizing  defaults  from
           /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/SRSS.utdialog_defaults.props.
           If no entry exists for a particular  key,  prompt  the
           user      in     the     standard     fashion.     See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utinstall.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utinstall(8)



     -n    AIC: If required to prompt the  user,  exit  with  bad
           status.

     -D dialog_dir
           AIC:  Read  AIC  utdialog_responses.props  files  from
           dialog_dir,  and  copy them into the standard location
           after product installation.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |        Attribute Value      |
    | Availability                |  SUNWuti                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utdialog_responses.props(5), AIC(8)



































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utkeyadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utkeyadm(8)



NAME
     utkeyadm - Utility to manage Sun Ray device keys.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm  -a  -c  [-k ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm  -a  -U

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm  -d [-c ]
      -k 

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm -d  -c  [-CUI]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm -l [-c  ]  [-k  ]  [-
     HCUI]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm -L [-c  ]  [-k  ]  [-
     HCUI]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm -i [-f ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm  -o [-f ] [-c ] [-k
     ] [-CUI]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm -i [-f ] -b -c 

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm  -o [-f ] -b -c  -k
     

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkeyadm -h

DESCRIPTION
     utkeyadm is a utility to  administer  device  keys  for  Sun
     Rays.  Every  Sun  Ray  device  or other client has a unique
     private DSA key, which the server uses to  authenticate  the
     device when it connects.

     When a Sun Ray device connects to a server  (or  replication
     group  of servers) for the first time, its key is registered
     in the Sun Ray Data Store. On  subsequent  connections,  the
     client  authentication key is compared to the key stored for
     the client to confirm authenticity.

     Note  that  client  authentication  can  be  disabled  using
     utcrypto(8).

     Every stored client key is assigned a trust status.  When  a
     key  is  initially  registered,  it  is assigned a status of
     "unconfirmed". When the authenticity of a given  key  for  a
     given  Sun  Ray  device  is  established  by other means, an
     administrator can  use  utkeyadm  to  assign  a  "confirmed"
     status.  Some  possible  ways to ascertain authenticity of a



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utkeyadm(8)



     key are:

     -    Compare the key fingerprint with  the  key  fingerprint
          shown  by the client, for example on the Stop-K display
          of a Sun Ray device.

     -    Ensure that the client device  is  currently  connected
          through  a  tamper-proof  network  (for  example direct
          link) with a fully authenticated connection.

     Sun Ray server access policy can be set to  restrict  access
     to  clients whose keys have been confirmed as authentic (see
     utpolicy(8).  If a client submits a key  that  is  different
     from the key already registered for that client, the outcome
     depends on the status of the stored  key.  If  that  key  is
     "confirmed",  the  client  submitting  a  different  key  is
     rejected. If the stored key is "unconfirmed", the new key is
     also  added to the Data Store, but the client will be locked
     out until one of the  conflict  keys  is  confirmed  as  the
     authentic one.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a   Confirm authenticity of a key for a specific DTU or  of
          all non-conflicting unconfirmed keys for their DTUs.

     For confirming a single key, the desktop ID (terminalCID) of
     the  client to which the key belongs must be specified.  For
     best control over the authenticity of  the  key  being  con-
     firmed,  the key ID (fingerprint) should be specified expli-
     citly as well. If multiple keys are associated to a DTU, the
     key  ID must be specified. Any conflicting keys for the same
     DTU are deleted from the data store when a specific  key  is
     confirmed.   If an already confirmed key is confirmed again,
     the confirmation timestamp and  user-id  for  this  key  are
     updated.

     If it is certain that  all  keys  that  currently  exist  in
     "unconfirmed"  state  are  authentic,  the  -U option may be
     specified to confirm them all  at  once.  If  multiple  keys
     matching  the  criteria are found for a DTU, none of them is
     confirmed.

     -d   Delete keys for a specific DTU. Either  a specific  key
          ID or the desktop id must be specified for this option.
          The deletion may be further  restricted  to  keys  with
          given status.

     -l   List all or selected key-to-client  registrations.  The
          list  may  be  restricted to a specific key, a specific
          client desktop and/or keys with given status.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                         utkeyadm(8)



     -L   List all or  selected  key-to-client  registrations  in
          long  format. Long format displays the same information
          that is displayed with the -l option and adds  informa-
          tion about the origin of a key and its status: the time
          when the key was first registered for the desktop,  the
          time  when  the key was last confirmed and the user who
          last confirmed authenticity of the key for the  associ-
          ated  desktop. The list may be restricted to a specific
          key, a specific client desktop and/or keys  with  given
          status.

     -i   Import keys from a file previously created with the  -o
          option.   If  no  filename  is  specified, the function
          reads from standard input.  If the -b option is  given,
          a  single  key is read from a binary key file.  In that
          case the desktop ID of the  client  to  which  the  key
          belongs  must  be provided and the key will be imported
          as "unconfirmed".

     -o   Export all or selected keys to a file. If  no  filename
          is  specified,  data is written to standard output. The
          export may be restricted to a specific key, a  specific
          client  desktop  and/or keys with given status.  If the
          -b option is given, a single key is written to a binary
          key  file.   Otherwise the selected keys, the client to
          which they belong and the status of the association are
          written  to  a text file, that can be used as backup or
          to import the keys and their associations into  a  dif-
          ferent server.

     -h   Display a help message.

     -C   Apply the operation only  to  keys  with  status  "con-
          firmed".   This  option may be combined with the -U and
          -I options.  If none of  these  options  is  specified,
          status is not considered for selection of keys.

     -H   Display column headers on the key listing.

     -I   Apply the  operation  only  to  keys  with  an  invalid
          status,  other than "confirmed" or "unconfirmed".  This
          option may be combined with the -C and -U options.   If
          none  of these options is specified, status is not con-
          sidered for selection of keys.

     -U   Apply the operation only to keys  with  status  "uncon-
          firmed".   This  option may be combined with the -C and
          -I options.  If none of  these  options  is  specified,
          status is not considered for selection of keys.

     -b   Import or export a single  key  to/from  a  binary  key
          file.  The  binary  key file format stores only the key



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                         utkeyadm(8)



          data, not the desktop to which the key belongs  or  the
          status of the association.

     -c cid
          The terminalCID or desktop ID of the desktop  to  which
          the keys belong.

     -k key-id
          The fingerprint of the key to operate on.  The  finger-
          print  consists  of 16 bytes, represented as 32 hexade-
          cimal digits. The bytes  may  be  delimited  by  colons
          (':').

     -f filename
          The file to use for import or export of keys.


EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found

SEE ALSO
     utcrypto(8), utpolicy(8)

































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utkiosk.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utkiosk(8)



NAME
     utkiosk - manage configuration for Sun Ray Kiosk Mode

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkiosk -i name   [-f  file]  [-A  applist-
     file]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkiosk -e name  [-s|-a]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkiosk -d name

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkiosk -l

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkiosk -h

DESCRIPTION
     The utkiosk tool is used to manage Kiosk Mode  configuration
     stored  in  the  Sun  Ray  administration  database. utkiosk
     allows storing, retrieving and deleting kiosk  configuration
     data.

     The data stored by utkiosk is  instantly  applied  to  newly
     started  Sun  Ray  Kiosk Mode sessions. To enable Kiosk Mode
     for Sun Ray sessions, use the  -k  option  to  the  utpolicy
     tool.

     Kiosk configuration  consists  of  a  session  configuration
     file, that references an installed kiosk session descriptor,
     as well as an optional application list. The session  confi-
     guration file must be in the session.conf(5) format, as pro-
     cessed by the kioskconfig(8) tool. The KIOSK_SESSION_APPLIST
     setting cannot be used here. Instead an application list for
     application container sessions can be specified  as  a  file
     using  the  -A option. The application list will be embedded
     in the stored settings rather  than  maintained  as  a  file
     reference.

     In addition to the common session.conf settings, you can use
     the  KIOSK_SESSION_TIMEOUT_DETACHED  setting  to  specify  a
     timeout (in seconds) after which a disconnected  kiosk  ses-
     sion will be terminated.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    Export only the application list contained in the con-
           figuration  entry.   The  -a  option  cannot  be  used
           together with -s.

     -A applist-file
           Import an application list from applist-file.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                          utkiosk(8)



     -d name
           Delete the kiosk configuration entry named  name  from
           the  datastore. Kiosk Mode is disabled, if the session
           entry is deleted.

     -e name
           Export the kiosk configuration entry named  name  from
           the  datastore.  By  default a complete session confi-
           guration is exported. A configured application list is
           embedded  in  the  exported  session  configuration as
           KIOSK_SESSION_APPLIST entry. The -s and -a options can
           be used to separately export the session configuration
           and application list.

     -f file
           Specify the file from which session  configuration  is
           read.  If  this option is not provided, session confi-
           guration is read from standard input.

     -h    Print a usage message and exit.

     -i name
           Import session configuration into the kiosk configura-
           tion  entry named name in the datastore. Configuration
           consists of session configuration, which is read  from
           a file or from standard input and an optional applica-
           tion list.
           If the session configuration file contains a non-empty
           KIOSK_SESSION   value,   but   does   not   contain  a
           KIOSK_ENABLED value, KIOSK_ENABLED=yes is implied  for
           the resulting configuration.

     -l    List the names of all  available  kiosk  configuration
           entries.

     -s    Export the session  configuration  without  policy  or
           embedded application list. The output does not contain
           a KIOSK_ENABLED or KIOSK_SESSION_APPLIST setting.  The
           -s option cannot be used together with -a.

OPERANDS
     name  The name of the kiosk configuration entry in the data-
           store. The following entries are currently defined for
           Sun Ray Kiosk Mode:

              session
                 The session entry holds default kiosk configura-
                 tion data for Sun Ray Kiosk Mode.

              kiosk
                 This entry was used in prior versions for confi-
                 guring Controlled Access Mode 3.x and older. You



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                          utkiosk(8)



                 can still  access  this  configuration  data  by
                 using  the kiosk name. The -a, -s and -A options
                 cannot be used with kiosk.

           Other entries can be used to store additional  session
           configurations,  which  can be used with kiosk session
           overrides (see utkioskoverride(8)).  Entry names  must
           start  with  a  letter  and  consist entirely of ASCII
           letters and digits. Entry names consisting entirely of
           lowercase  letters  are  reserved  for  use by Sun Ray
           Kiosk Mode.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command imports session  configuration  into
     the datastore.

     # utkiosk -i session -f mysession.conf

     Example 2: This command imports configuration for an  appli-
     cation  container session and an associated application list
     into the datastore.

     # utkiosk -i session -f mydesktop.conf -A myapplist

     Example 3: This command stores session configuration to  use
     the  Kiosk  session  defined  in  the mysession.conf session
     descriptor under the name SpecialSession. The resulting con-
     figuration  can  be  selected  using  the utkioskoverride(8)
     tool.

     # echo "KIOSK_SESSION=mysession" | utkiosk -i SpecialSession

     Example 4: This command exports the  complete  configuration
     from the datastore into a file.

     # utkiosk -e session > mysession.conf

     Example 5: These commands exchange the application  list  to
     be used with the current application container session.

     # utkiosk -e session -s > /tmp/mysession.conf
     # utkiosk -i session -f /tmp/mysession.conf -A newapplist

     Example 6: This command  exports  the  legacy  configuration
     into a local file.

     # utkiosk -e kiosk > kiosk.conf

     Example 7: This command deletes  legacy  configuration  data
     from the datastore.





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                          utkiosk(8)



     # utkiosk -d kiosk

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kioskconfig(8),  session.conf(5),   kiosk(8),   utkioskover-
     ride(8)
































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utkioskoverride.8



Sun Ray System Administration                  utkioskoverride(8)



NAME
     utkioskoverride - Set or query the session type assigned  to
     tokens.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride  [ -r raw ] [ -t token ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride  -s session [ -c  config  ]
     {-r raw|-t token}

DESCRIPTION
     The utkioskoverride command provides a way to set  the  ses-
     sion  type  associated  with a token or to query the session
     type currently associated with  a  token.  Possible  session
     types  are  "default" (where the system wide policy dictates
     the  session  type),  "kiosk"  (where  a  kiosk  session  is
     assigned  to that token regardless of the system policy) and
     "regular" (where  a  regular,  i.e  non  kiosk,  session  is
     assigned to the token regardless of the system policy).  For
     a "kiosk" session, a named session configuration as  created
     using  utkiosk(8)  can be assigned to be used for the speci-
     fied token.

OPTIONS
     Without any options, the command will print out a usage mes-
     sage. Otherwise, the following options are supported:

     -s session {-r raw|-t token}
           Set the session type for a token to the specified ses-
           sion, which must be either "default", "kiosk" or "reg-
           ular". Either a raw insert token (with the -r  option)
           or a session token (with the -t option) must be speci-
           fied as the target of the assignment. The command will
           assign  the session type directly to the session token
           or to the logical token associated with the registered
           raw  insert  token.  At this time, only logical tokens
           are supported as valid arguments for  the  -t  option.
           Future  releases may allow assigning a session type to
           other session token  types.  If  the  specified  token
           fails to meet the requirements (i.e is neither a logi-
           cal token for the -t option nor a registered token for
           the -r option), the command will return an error code.

     -c config
           Assign the  session  configuration  name  config  (see
           utkiosk(8))  to  be  used  for  the  given token. This
           option is only valid with the -s kiosk option.

     -r raw -t token
           Query and display the currently assigned session  type



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                  utkioskoverride(8)



           and session configuration for the specified token.  At
           least one of a raw insert token (with the  -r  option)
           or  a  session token (with the -t option) must be pro-
           vided, and the command will attempt to find  the  ses-
           sion type with the following logic: if a session token
           is specified and has an associated  session  type,  it
           will  be  displayed,  else  if  a  raw insert token is
           specified and is registered as a logical  token,  that
           token's associated session type will be displayed.

           The command displays the value of the session type and
           configuration in the following format:

           SESSION_TYPE=   SESSION_CONFIG=

           where  can be either "default",  "kiosk"
           or  "regular".  If  the tokens provided don't have any
           explicit session  type  assigned,  "default"  will  be
           printed  out.   If  no  session configuration has been
           assigned, the SESSION_CONFIG line is  omitted.  Other-
           wise,    is  the specified configuration
           name.

           You can use the utuser(8) command to view session type
           assignments for multiple logical tokens.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This  command  sets  the  session  type  for  the
     registered smart card "MicroPayFlex.12345678" to "regular":

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride -s regular -r MicroPayFlex.12345678

     Example 2: This command sets the session type for the  logi-
     cal  token  "user.123456-78"  to a "kiosk" session using the
     "Special" session configuration:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride -s kiosk -c Special -t user.123456-78

     Example 3: This command queries the  session  type  for  the
     smart card "MicroPayFlex.98765432":

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride -r MicroPayFlex.98765432
     SESSION_TYPE=default

     Example 4: This command queries the  session  type  for  the
     logical token user.123456-78:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utkioskoverride -t user.123456-78
     SESSION_TYPE=default
     SESSION_CONFIG=Special




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                  utkioskoverride(8)



EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     If no token is specified or the session type or config
           name is invalid

     2     If the token is not a suitable token when using the -s
           option

     3     If the executable is not run as root when using the -s
           option

     4     Generic error

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utpolicy(8), utuser(8), utkiosk(8), attributes(5)



























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utlicenseadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                     utlicenseadm(8)



NAME
     utlicenseadm - Utility to manage Sun Ray device licenses.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utlicenseadm  -l   [-t  ]  [-k
     ]  [  ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utlicenseadm  -d   [-t  ]  [-k
     ]   

DESCRIPTION
     utlicenseadm is a utility to administer device licenses  for
     Sun  Rays.  Currently, it can be used to list and delete MS-
     TSCAL licenses stored by the Sun Ray  Windows  Connector  in
     SRDS.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -l   List the licenses. If no desktopid  is  specified  then
          all matching licenses are listed for all DTUs.

     -d   Delete licenses for a specific DTU. The desktop id must
          be  specified for this option. A specific license for a
          DTU may be deleted by providing appropiate license type
          and/or license key.

     -t licenseType
          Specify  the  license  type  to  be  administered.  The
          current supported license type is only "RDPLicense".

     -k licenseKey
          A key for the license if applicable.

      desktopid
          Desktop id to administer the device license for.


EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found

SEE ALSO
     uttsc(1)












SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utmhadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utmhadm(8)



NAME
     utmhadm - Sun Ray DTU multihead group configuration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm [ groupname ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm   -a groupname   -g COLSxROWS    -p
     primaryCID   -l CID1,CID2,...,CIDn

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm  -d groupname

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm  -e [ -f filename ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm  -o [ -f filename ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm  -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm

DESCRIPTION
     The utmhadm command provides a way  to  administer  Sun  Ray
     server   multihead  groups.  The  information  that  utmhadm
     displays and that is editable  is  stored  in  the  Sun  Ray
     administration database.

     The utmhadm operations that only display information may  be
     run  by any user. Operations that change data must be run as
     superuser.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a groupname
           Creates a new multihead group having identifier group-
           name.  This  name must be unique and not already exist
           on the system.

     -d groupname
           Removes the multihead group for the  specified  group-
           name.

     -e    Populates the system  multihead  group  database  with
           input data of the format produced by -o, from standard
           input.

     -f filename
           Specify a filename for use with -e or  -o  instead  of
           standard input or output.

     -g COLSxROWS
           Specifies the geometry of the multihead group  in  the
           form  COLSxROWS.  This number of columns and rows must



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                          utmhadm(8)



           not exceed the maximum number allowed and  must  match
           the  number of DTUs specified with -l. This option can
           only be used with -a.

     -h    Prints the usage message.

     -l CID1, CID2,..., CIDn
           Specifies the DTU canonical identifiers when  creating
           a   group.   A   canonical  identifier  has  the  form
           IEEE802.nnnnnnnnnnnn  or  nnnnnnnnnnnn  (the  12-digit
           hexadecimal  MAC address of the DTU) and the list must
           be comma-separated. The identifiers must be  specified
           in row-major order. The maximum number of DTUs allowed
           is 16.

     -o    Dumps all system configured multihead group  data,  in
           comma-separated  format,  to standard output. Intended
           for subsequent use with -e.

     -p primaryCID
           Identifies which in the list of canonical identifiers,
           specified  with  -l,  is designated as the primary DTU
           within the group. The primary is repeated in the  list
           specified by -l. This option can only be used with -a.

     When no options  are  provided,  utmhadm  lists  information
     about all multihead groups configured on the system.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command list all DTUs that are in the multi-
     head group:

     % /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm tera

     Here is sample output:

     Multihead Group    Geometry           CIDs
     ------------------ ------------------ --------------------------------
     tera               geometry=2x1       IEEE802.080020b538dc (P)
                                           IEEE802.080020b56e2d

     Example 2: This command creates a terminal group having  two
     terminals with the first one being the primary:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhadm -a srgroupA -g 2x1 -p
     IEEE802.080020b0562f -l IEEE802.080020b0562f,IEEE802.080020b64574

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                          utmhadm(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utxconfig(1), Sun Ray Server Software Administrator's Guide















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utmhconfig.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utmhconfig(8)



NAME
     utmhconfig - Sun Ray mulithead GUI configuration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utmhconfig

DESCRIPTION
     The utmhconfig utility allows  the  administrator  to  list,
     add,  or  delete multihead groups easily. The initial screen
     lists  any  existing  multiheaded  groups  and  allows   the
     administrator  to  select  those  to delete. The utility can
     also be used to create a new group. To do this, the adminis-
     trator  starts  the  utility  on  the Sun Ray DTU that is to
     become the "primary" of the  group  (it  has  the  keyboard,
     mouse, and all the devices for the group). The administrator
     selects "Create New Group" and follows the  instructions  in
     the  wizard to identify all of the terminals in the new mul-
     tihead group. The administrator run the  utmhconfig  command
     as  superuser  and  must have a recognized smart card avail-
     able.

OPTIONS
     There are no options for utmhconfig

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utmhadm(1M), utxconfig(1)



















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utmhscreen.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utmhscreen(8)



NAME
     utmhscreen - Sun Ray multihead GUI screen display tool.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utmhscreen [ -l ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utmhscreen tool provides a window showing the respective
     displays  location in the multihead group. The display show-
     ing the widow is  highlighted  in  white,  while  the  other
     displays  are  darkened.  The window is located in the upper
     right corner of the display.

     This tool is automatically launched for users during  the  X
     server  startup  process (session creation). If the X server
     is not running in a multihead environment, the tool  immedi-
     ately exits.

OPTIONS
     utmhscreen accepts the following option:

          -l    Indicates to utmhscreen that  it  is  being  auto
                launched  by  the  windowing  system.  The use of
                this option is beyond the scope of this manual.


RESOURCES
     The tool understands all of the core  X  Toolkit  and  Motif
     resource names and classes as well as:

          enableAutoLaunch (class EnableAutoLaunch)
                Specifies whether or  not  utmhscreen  should  be
                launched  automatically during X session startup.
                The default is "true".


EXAMPLES
     Example 1: To disable automatic launching of utmhscreen  for
     a   user,   set   the   following   X   resource   in  their
     $HOME/.Xdefaults file:

     Utmhscreen*enableAutoLaunch: false

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:









SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                       utmhscreen(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Types       |       Attribute Values      |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Evolving                    |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utmhadm(1M). utmhconfig(1M), utxconfig(1)














































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utmountd.8



Sun Ray Administration Commands                       utmountd(8)



NAME
     utmountd - Sun Ray Mass Storage media mounter daemon

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utmountd    -m    [-D    debug-level]    [-p
     poll_interval] [-t max_threads]

DESCRIPTION
     utmountd performs mount and umount  operations  on  Sun  Ray
     mass  storage  devices  managed  by utstoraged(8). Slices or
     partitions with OS recognizable filesystems are mounted on a
     directory  inside  the  current  sessions  mount  directory,
     $DTDEVROOT/mnt.

     Error    messages    from    utmountd    are    logged    to
     /var/opt/SUNWut/log/utmountd.log.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

               -D debug-level

               Debug mode. Use is beyond the scope of this  docu-
               ment.  If a debug level is set, debug messages are
               sent to stderr.

               -p poll_interval

               Minimum time in seconds between polling  removable
               media devices for media insertion events

               -t max_threads

               Maximum number  of  simultaneous  service  threads
               allowed.  The more active threads, higher the load
               on the system. A  lower  number  of  threads  mean
               slower  response  times  to mounting or unmounting
               devices if the daemon is overloaded with work.

FILES
     The following files are used:

               $DTDEVROOT/mnt

               A  link  pointing  to  the  directory   containing
               mount points

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     DTDEVROOT points to a temporary  directory  associated  with
     the user's session. The directory's lifetime is equal to the
     lifetime of the login session. It is removed, along with its
     contents, when the user logs out.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray Administration Commands                       utmountd(8)



SEE ALSO
     utdiskadm(8), utstoraged(8), utdisk(4)





















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utparalleld.8



Sun Ray System Administration                      utparalleld(8)



NAME
     utparalleld - Sun Ray printer service daemon.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utparalleld   [   -D  debug-level  ]   [  -o
     optroot ]  [ -r ]

DESCRIPTION
     utparalleld provides  printer  support  for  Sun  Ray  DTUs.
     utparalleld  supplies  driver  services for all USB parallel
     adaptors and USB printers that comply with the  USB  printer
     class.

     utparalleld uses the Sun Ray parallel I/O driver on  solaris
     and Sun Ray utio driver on linux to provide applications the
     same interface as standard workstation parallel ports,  such
     as  /dev/ecpp  or  /dev/bpp  on  solaris and /dev/parport on
     linux.  Applications such as the lp(1) daemon can use device
     nodes that are provided by utparalleld.

     When a parallel adaptor or a USB printer is  attached  to  a
     DTU,    utparalleld    creates    device    nodes   in   the
     $UTDEVROOT/devices directory. A user can use the device link
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/printers/printer-name  to  access  a specific
     printer.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -D debug-level
           Debug mode. Use is beyond the scope of this document.

     -o optroot
           Use optroot as the parallel service's  root  directory
           for  device  node  creation.   The  default  value  is
           /tmp/SUNWut.  optroot should be the same directory  as
           the optroot directory used by utdevmgrd(1M).

     -r    Automatically restart the printer service daemon if it
           exits.   With  this option, the printer service daemon
           creates two processes: a child that performs  all  the
           actual  work,  and  a  parent  monitoring process. The
           parent process restarts a child if  the  previous  one
           exits.

FILES
     The following files are used:

     $UTDEVROOT/dev/printers
           The directory  containing  links  to  parallel  device
           names for each DTU..




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                      utparalleld(8)



ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray DTU associated with a user's session.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utdevmgrd(1M), utseriald(1M)







































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utpolicy.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utpolicy(8)



NAME
     utpolicy - Sun Ray authentication manager policy  management
     command.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpolicy  -a [ -g ] [ -h ] [-c] [ -D ] [ -p
     ]  [ -r type ] [ -s type ] [ -z type ] [ -u type ] [ -k type
     ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpolicy [ -A ] [ -Z ] [ -n ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpolicy

DESCRIPTION
     The utpolicy command simplifies and writes the policy confi-
     guration of the Sun Ray authentication manager, utauthd(1M).

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     POLICY SETTING

     The specified Policy Setting  arguments  completely  replace
     the  current  active  authentication  policy. Only arguments
     that are specified become active. Policy  Setting  and  Card
     Reader Assignment arguments can be specified together

     -a    This option, followed by valid Policy Setting, or Card
           Reader  Assignment  arguments, applies these arguments
           to the active authentication policy  for  the  system.
           This option is not valid by itself.

     -c    Require client authentication keys to be confirmed  as
           genuine. Clients that authenticate with an unconfirmed
           key are denied access.  Keys authenticity can be  con-
           firmed  using  utkeyadm(8).  For full effectiveness of
           this option, mandatory upstream authentication  should
           be configured (see utcrypto(8)).

     -D    Enable legacy hotdesking behavior.  In this mode, user
           sessions  are  accessed directly rather than requiring
           external authentication first.  Note that this is less
           secure  than  the  default behavior, and is not recom-
           mended for security reasons.

     -g    Turn on  session  selection  within  a  server  group.
           Allows  the  user to select on which server the user's
           session is run.

     -k {card|pseudo|both}
           Enables Kiosk Mode for  the  specified  session  type.
           Selecting  card  enables Kiosk Mode for card sessions,



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utpolicy(8)



           selecting pseudo for terminal sessions; and  selecting
           both enables Kiosk Mode for all types of sessions. For
           functionality, at least one  of  the  -r,  -s,  or  -z
           options  must be invoked with the same argument as the
           -k option. The -k option is not considered  until  the
           utconfig  application  has configured for Kiosk Mode.

           Note: Kiosk Mode policy enabled using  the  -k  option
           may be overriden using utkioskoverride(8).

     -m    Enable multihead session capability, allowing multiple
           terminals  to act as display devices for a single user
           session.

     -p    This  option  changes  the  behavior  of   the   self-
           registration application so that it does not require a
           name and password before  registering  a  token.  Note
           that  the  self-registration application only verifies
           the name and password. They are not stored.

     -r {card|pseudo|both}
           Specify the token types that must be registered in the
           administrative  database in order to be granted access
           to a login screen. Policy  looks  up  and  uses  token
           database entry

     -s {card|pseudo|both}
           Specify the token types that will be presented with  a
           registration  screen  if  they do not have an entry in
           the  administrative  database.   Policy  allows  self-
           registration of tokens.

     -u {card|pseudo|both}
           Specify the token  types  that  are  accepted  from  a
           client  that  is  not a regular hardware terminal, for
           example from a software client.  Any  access  policies
           for  these  token  types  still  apply.   Without this
           option, or for  token  types  not  specified  in  this
           option,  software clients are not granted access. Note
           that allowing a smart card token for  hotdesking  with
           this  option  can  pose  a  security  risk since a non
           hardware terminal may be compromised  and  coerced  to
           respond  to  smart  card  transactions from the server
           with emulated smart card responses that  are  in  fact
           being  generated  by the compromised client code. This
           has the possibility of granting a session  to  such  a
           spoofed token type.

     -z {card|pseudo|both}
           Specify the token types that do not require  an  entry
           in  the administrative database in order to be granted
           access to a login  screen.  Policy  grants  access  to



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                         utpolicy(8)



           tokens without database entry.

     -A    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses                                         from
           /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props.
           If  no  entry  exists for a particular key, prompt the
           user     in     the     standard     fashion.      See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utpolicy.

     -Z    AIC: Use default responses,  utilizing  defaults  from
           /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_defaults.props.
           If no entry exists for a particular  key,  prompt  the
           user      in     the     standard     fashion.     See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utpolicy.

     -n    AIC: If required to prompt the  user,  exit  with  bad
           status.

     With the -h option, the  utpolicy  command  prints  out  the
     usage message.

     With no options, the utpolicy command prints out the  policy
     in effect.

     The following options are RESERVED for use by  the  Sun  Ray
     Server Software and should not be used:

     -G, -P, -Q, -b, -f, -l, -x, +x

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command configures the policy  so  that  all
     access  via smart card on a hardware client requires a valid
     administrative database entry before access is granted. If a
     database entry has not been created for a smart card, then a
     registration session is presented on the DTU.  If  no  smart
     card is used, then the normal login screen is presented.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpolicy -a -r card -s card -z pseudo

     Example 2: This command configures the policy  so  that  all
     access  via  smart  card  on  both hardware clients and non-
     hardware clients require  a  valid  administrative  database
     entry  before access is granted. If a database entry has not
     been created for a smart card, then a  registration  session
     is  presented on the DTU. If no smart card is used, then the
     normal login screen is presented.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpolicy -a -r card -s card -z pseudo -u card





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                         utpolicy(8)



FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/policy/utpolicy


     The policy configuration file

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props


     Sun Ray authentication manager's configuration file

SEE ALSO
     utauthd(8),  utreader(8),  utstart(8),   utkioskoverride(8),
     auth.props(5),    pam(3PAM),    utdialog_responses.props(5),
     AIC(8)






































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utpreserve.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utpreserve(8)



NAME
     utpreserve - Sun Ray configuration file  preservation  util-
     ity.

SYNOPSIS
     /cdrom/cdrom0/utpreserve  [ -d preserve-directory ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utpreserve command stops Sun  Ray  services,  terminates
     user  sessions, and saves existing Sun Ray server configura-
     tion    data     into     a     compressed     tar     file,
     /var/tmp/SUNWut.upgrade/preserve_4.3.tar.gz.

OPTIONS
     The following option is supported.

     -d preserve-directory
           Save  the  compressed  tar  file  into  the  preserve-
           directory.

SEE ALSO
     utinstall(1M), utconfig(1M)

































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utpw.8



Sun Ray System Administration                             utpw(8)



NAME
     utpw - Sun Ray administration password change utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpw

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpw [-a [-n]] -p

DESCRIPTION
     The utpw command changes the Sun Ray administrator  password
     (also  known  as the  "UT admin" password). This password is
     entered by the administrator when logging into the  Adminis-
     tration  Tool and is used to make a privileged connection to
     the LDAP server.

     utpw changes the password both in the  administration  data-
     base, and the password file on the local server.

     In a failover group, utpw also  affects  the  administration
     database  of  the  secondary  servers, but only the password
     file on the local server. The administrator  must  log  into
     the  secondary  servers  and  run utpw on them to change the
     password files.

     Upon successful input,  utpw  stores  the  password  in  the
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props
     file using the key "utconfig.Password".

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -p    Print the current password in clear text. This  option
           should  be  used with care to avoid exposing the pass-
           word to unauthorized persons.

     -a    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses                                         from
           /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props.
           If  no  entry  exists for a particular key, prompt the
           user     in     the     standard     fashion.      See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utpw.

     -n    AIC: If required to prompt the  user,  exit  with  bad
           status.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command changes the administration password:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpw
     Enter new UT admin password:
     Re-enter new UT admin password:



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                             utpw(8)



     Enter old UT admin password:

     Changing LDAP password...
     Done.
     Changing password file...
     Done.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.pw

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Error

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     AIC(8),               utdesktop(8),               utuser(8),
     utdialog_responses.props(5), AIC(8), Sun Ray Server Software
     Administrator's Guide




















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utquery.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utquery(8)



NAME
     utquery - query Sun  Ray  Desktop  Units  current  parameter
     values

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utquery [-d] IP_address

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utquery -h

DESCRIPTION
     The utquery  command  allows  administrators  to  query  the
     current  parameter  values  on a Sun Ray Desktop Unit (DTU).
     The IP_address may specify the network IP address of a  sin-
     gle  DTU  to  query, a subnet broadcast address to query all
     DTUs on the subnet or the broadcast  address  to  query  all
     DTUs associated with this Sun Ray server.

     The utquery command can be used to aid in  diagnosing  prob-
     lems  when  a  DTU  is  unable to successfully connect to an
     authentication manager or  when  a  Multihead    group    is
     redirected outside their "home" failover group.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -d    Report the DHCP parameters the DTU obtained  at  boot-
           up.

     -h    Print the usage.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: To display the DHCP values  for  the  DTU  at  IP
     address 129.146.58.182

     % utquery -d 10.6.130.190

     The following is an example of the output  for  the  command
     above:

     terminalID=00144f0e8a60
             terminalIPA=10.6.130.190
             model=SunRayP8
             Subnet=255.255.255.0
             Router=10.6.130.1
             MTU=1500
             Broadcst=10.6.130.255
             LeaseTim=86400
             DHCPServer=10.6.130.3
             AuthSrvr=10.6.102.113
             FwSrvr=10.6.102.113
             tftpSrvr=nomad-70.sfbay.sun.com
             parmsVersion=GUIkent_vpn32_2007.07.02.16.21



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                          utquery(8)



             parmsBarrier=320
             parmsBarrierLevel=320
             parmsServers=nomad-70,nomad-65
             configMTU=1500
             currentAuth=10.6.129.70
             currentFW=GUIkent_vpn32_2007.07.02.16.21
             currentBarrier=320
             currentBarrierLevel=320
             currentMTU=1500
             dnsList=129.147.5.51,129.145.155.32,129.145.155.42
             dname=SFBay.Sun.COM
             confNetType=DHCP
             confTftpSrvr=nomad-70.sfbay.sun.com
             confServers=nomad-70

     In the output above, there can be a number  of  values  with
     Barrier  in  the  name, and understanding the differences is
     subtle. In general, the Barrier value is the  value  associ-
     ated  with  a  firmware file, and its corresponding version.
     So, currentBarrier is the  barrier  value  for  the  current
     firmware running on the DTU, and parmsBarrier is the barrier
     level of the file residing on the firmware  server.  In  the
     absence of any BarrierLevel values, the firmware file on the
     server will not be loaded if its Barrier value is less  than
     the  currently  running firmware. For example, in the output
     above, the currentBarrier is 310, so  any  attempt  to  load
     SRSS  2.0  firmware, which has a barrier level of 200, would
     fail. In order to permit the forced loading of firmware with
     a lower barrier level, the BarrierLevel values are used. The
     BarrierLevel is  either  the  currentBarrier  value  of  the
     resident  firmware,  the  BarrierLevel  value  provided from
     DHCP, or the  parmsBarrierLevel  obtained  from  the  .parms
     file.  Later values in this list take precedence if present.
     It is the currentBarrierLevel that is compared with the bar-
     rier level of the server's file to determine if the download
     is permitted or not.

     New firmware released with SRSS 4.0 contains optional  capa-
     bility  to  store  limited  local  configuration in flash on
     DTUs. Due to security considerations for  some  deployments,
     two  versions of firmware are available, one with this capa-
     bility, and one without.  Firmware  with  a  version  string
     beginning  with  "GUI" incorporates this functionality.  The
     local values override values obtained from DHCP, except  for
     the  MTU,  which  is  computed  as the minimum of the values
     received.  The following values will be included if  defined
     in the local configuration:

     confNetType
           The network configuration type, which can  be  one  of
           DHCP or Static.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                          utquery(8)



     confIPA
           The locally configured IP address, enabled  in  Static
           mode.

     confSubnet
           The locally configured subnet mask, enabled in  Static
           mode.

     confRouter
           The locally  configured  default  router,  enabled  in
           Static mode.

     confBroadcst
           The locally configured broadcast address,  enabled  in
           Static mode.

     confMTU
           The  locally  configured  Maximum  Transmission  Unit,
           always used.

     confServers
           The locally configured Sun Ray server list, which is a
           comma-separated list of host names or IP addresses.

     confTftpSrvr
           The locally configured TFTP server value, used to read
           .parms and firmware files.

     confLogHost
           The locally configured Log host,  for  logging  syslog
           events.

     confDname
           The locally configured DNS domain name.

     confDnsList
           The  locally  configured  list  of   DNS   server   IP
           addresses.

     conf.bandwidth
           The locally configured bandwidth limit.

     Additional values may be  configured  locally,  including  a
     subset  of those that can be set in a .parms file.  If these
     are defined, they will be printed.

     Since the MTU value can come from several sources, there are
     possibly several MTU values printed:

     MTU   The minimum MTU value obtained from all DHCP sources.

     configMTU



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                          utquery(8)



           The MTU value computed as  the  minimum  of  DHCP  and
           local configuration.

     confMTU
           The locally configured MTU value.

     currentMTU
           The actual value being used currently by the DTU. This
           value  may  be  dynamically  determined  if  the value
           specified  in  configMTU  causes  fragmentation.   The
           currentMTU  value  will be lowered to avoid fragmenta-
           tion when it has been detected.

     The TFTP server used to access .parms files can be specified
     in  a  number  of  different  ways:  as a DHCP vendor option
     (FWSrvr), a locally configured value, DHCP option 66, or the
     default  host  name  "sunray-config-servers". The FWservType
     value specifies which of these is actually used. The  server
     value  can  be  either a name or an IP address. If a name is
     specified, the look up is done with  the  configured  domain
     name  appended,  with components stripped successively until
     the lookup succceeds or there are only two  components  left
     in  the  domain  name. If none of those lookup succeeds, the
     name is looked up by itself.  If the name itself ends with a
     ``.'', the name is taken to be a rooted name, and the domain
     name is not appended.

     Example 2: To display the DHCP values for all DTUs on subnet
     129.146.58:.

     utquery -d 129.146.58.255

     Example 3: To display the DHCP values for all DTUs  on  this
     server:

     utquery -d 255.255.255.255

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utfwadm(8)

NOTES




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray System Administration                          utquery(8)



     The utquery command  will  only  report  on  DTUs  that  are
     operating with firmware version 2.0 or newer.

     The utquery command will only report on DTUs that have  suc-
     cessfully acquired DHCP parameters from a DHCP server.

     The NewTVer value reported is the  firmware  revision  level
     supplied  by  DHCP,  which  is  used  to determine whether a
     firmware upgrade is required, but if  there  is  no  version
     value  from  the  .parms  file.   The currentFW value is the
     firmware revision level of the current firmware  running  in
     the Sun Ray device.

     The AuthSrvr and AltAuth values reported are those  provided
     by  DHCP  parameters at DTU boot time. The currentAuth value
     is the IP address of the Sun Ray server to which the Sun Ray
     is currently connected.

     In  firmware  version  3.1  and  newer,  additional   values
     obtained via TFTP from the .parms file are also printed.  If
     parmsVersion is defined, it overrides NewTVer.  If parmsVer-
     sion  is not defined in the .parms file, then it assumes the
     value of NewTVer, if that is defined. See the utfwadm manual
     page for descriptions of fields that may be contained in the
     .parms file.

     The utquery command with a broadcast address does  not  work
     on  remote  subnets  because most routers do not forward the
     broadcast-address packets.


























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5



utrcmd.8



Sun Ray System Administration                           utrcmd(8)



NAME
     utrcmd - Sun Ray remote administration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utrcmd  [ -n ]   hostname command [ args ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utrcmd program provides a way to  run  certain  Sun  Ray
     administration   commands   remotely.     It   contacts  the
     in.utrcmdddaemon on the remote  hostname  and  executes  the
     specified  command  with  the  specified  arguments args (if
     any).

     utrcmd copies its standard input to the  specified  command,
     the standard output of the command to utrcmd's standard out-
     put, and the standard error of the command to utrcmd's stan-
     dard error.  Interrupt, quit, and terminate signals are pro-
     pagated to the specified command; utrcmd terminates normally
     when the command does.

OPTIONS
     The following option is supported.

     -n    Redirect the input of utrcmd to /dev/null. This option
           prevents  interactions  between  utrcmd  and the shell
           which invokes it. For  example,  if  you  are  running
           utrcmd  and  invoke a utrcmd in the background without
           redirecting its input away from the terminal, it  will
           block  even  if  no  reads are posted by the specified
           command. The -n option prevents this behavior.

USAGE
     Official hostnames or nicknames may be given  as  the  host-
     name.

     The utrcmd and in.utrcmdd programs use the Sun Ray  failover
     group configuration to perform a set of checks before allow-
     ing the specified command to proceed.

     The program utrcmd runs with set-user-ID permission of  root
     or superuser. The utrcmd command proceeds only if all of the
     following are true (on the initiating system):

        o  The user's real user-ID is superuser, or the user  has
           membership rights in the utadmin group.

        o  The  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props  file  is   owned   by
           superuser  and  is  not  writable by anyone other than
           superuser.

        o  The gmSignatureFile property of auth.props specifies a
           group signature file.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                           utrcmd(8)



        o  The group  signature  file  exists  and  is  owned  by
           superuser and is not readable, writable, or executable
           by anyone other than superuser.

        o  The group signature file is at least 8 bytes long  and
           has   similar  content  diversity  characteristics  as
           required by passwd(1).

        o  The utrcmd/tcp6 service is enabled.

     The in.utrcmdd program will accept the  connection  only  if
     all of the following are true on the remote system:

        o  The utrcmd/tcp6 service is  enabled  and  matches  the
           configuration on the initiating system.

        o  The in.utrcmdd program is enabled in /etc/inetd.conf.

        o  The utadmin group is configured on the system.

        o  The  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props  file  is   owned   by
           superuser  and  is  not  writable by anyone other than
           superuser.

        o  The gmSignatureFile property of auth.props specifies a
           group  signature  file.The group signature file exists
           and is owned by superuser, and is not readable,  writ-
           able, or executable by anyone other than superuser.

        o  The group signature file is at least 8 bytes long  and
           has   similar  content  diversity  characteristics  as
           required by passwd(1).

     If the connection is accepted, the utrcmd program  begins  a
     challenge-response  handshake  with  the in.utrcmdd program,
     using the contents of the group signature file to sign  mes-
     sages  (without  revealing  the  contents  of  the signature
     file). Either utrcmd or in.utrcmdd will reject the  transac-
     tion if the handshake fails.  The specified command will not
     be run if the contents of the group signature files  on  the
     two systems differ.

     Finally, in.utrcmdd rejects the specified command if  it  is
     not recognized. Specified commands always run in group utad-
     min.

     The following commands are allowed and  are  always  run  in
     group utadmin:

        o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica

        o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utpolicy



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                           utrcmd(8)



        o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwadm

        o  /usr/sbin/dhtadm

        o  /usr/sbin/pntadm

        o  /opt/SUNWut/lib/utauthd

        o  /etc/init.d/utsvc

        o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsession

        o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader

        o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart

     Impact of disabling utrcmd:

     utrcmd is used to run certain Sun  Ray  administration  com-
     mands  on  remote systems. Hence disabling utrcmd means that
     the following functionality will not work as expected:

        o  Admin GUI

              o  Restart Services

              o  Sun Ray Session management

        o  CLI

              o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica to setup  a  failover
                 group

              o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utdssync to  convert  and  syn-
                 chronize the Sun Ray data store

              o  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utfwsync     to     synchronize
                 firmware levels

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command lists the configured  token  readers
     on a remote Sun Ray server

     # /opt/SUNWut/lib/utrcmd sun5 /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /etc/hosts






SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                           utrcmd(8)



     Internet host table

        o  /etc/group


     Group file

        o  /etc/inet/services


     Internet services table

        o  /etc/inetd.conf


     Internet services daemon configuration table

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.props


     Sun Ray authentication properties file

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utauthd(1M), inetd(1M), group(4),  auth.props(4),  hosts(4),
     nsswitch(4), passwd(1), rsh(1), attributes(5)

NOTES
     utrcmd works in a manner  similar  to  rsh(1).  However,  it
     imposes multiple restrictions to maintain system security.
















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utreader.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utreader(8)



NAME
     utreader - Sun Ray utility for configuring a terminal  as  a
     token reader.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader -a cid

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader -d cid

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreader -h

DESCRIPTION
     The utreader command is used to designate Sun Ray  terminals
     as dedicated token card readers.

     When utreader is run with no options, the list of  terminals
     currently  configured  as  token  readers within the current
     host group is displayed.   The  token  reader  list  can  be
     viewed by all users.  Changes to the token reader configura-
     tion may be made only by a suitably privileged user.

          Note:

          After the token reader configuration been  modified,  a
          cold restart of services must be performed in order for
          the new configuration to take effect.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a cid
           Adds the specified terminal to the list of token  card
           readers.

     -c    Clears (deletes all terminals from) the list of  token
           card readers.

     -d cid
           Deletes the specified terminal from the list of  token
           card readers.

     -h    Displays the usage message.

     A terminal is identified to the -a and  -d  options  by  its
     unique  individual  "canonical  ID" or "CID".  This is typi-
     cally a  string  of  the  form  IEEE802.EthernetMacID.   The
     IEEE802.  portion  of  that string is the default CID prefix
     and may be omitted from the command line.



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utreader(8)



EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command configures a terminal  whose  ID  is
     IEEE802.008020112233 as a token reader:

     % utreader -a 008020112233

     Example 2: This command unconfigures all token readers:

     utreader -c

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utstart(8), utconfig(8)

NOTES
     utreader is available only after utconfig(1M) has  been  run
     to activate the Sun Ray data store.

     The number of token card readers that may be  present  on  a
     host  group's  reader list at any one time may be limited by
     the implementation.  Historically the limit has  been  eight
     readers.   This  implementation  guarantees that at least 48
     readers will be supported at one time.  It is possible  that
     more than 48 readers may be configured in some circumstances
     but a site should not depend on being able to exceed  48  in
     future SRSS releases.













SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utrelease.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utrelease(8)



NAME
     utrelease - CLI to display Sun Ray Software version

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrelease

DESCRIPTION
     The utrelease command can be used to display  the  installed
     version of Sun Ray Software product.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This prints the Sun Ray product name and version.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrelease
     Sun Ray Software 5.2








































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utreplica.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utreplica(8)



NAME
     utreplica - LDAP replication utility for Sun Ray servers.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica   -p  [  -a  |  -d  ]  secondary-
     server1  [ secondary-server2

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica   -s primary-server

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica   -l

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica   -u

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica   -z [ port# ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utreplica   [ -A ] [ -D ] [ -n ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utreplica command configures the Sun Ray LDAP server  to
     replicate  data  from  the  primary server to each secondary
     server in a failover group. The command  must  be  run  with
     superuser privileges on the Sun Ray server to be configured.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -l    List the current failover administration status.

     -p [-a|-d] secondary-server
           Configure the primary server. secondary-server is  the
           host  name  of the secondary server. List all seondary
           servers within the failover group.

           -a is used to add the specified secondary  servers  to
           the current list of secondary servers.

           -d is used to delete the specified  secondary  servers
           from the current list of secondary servers.

     -s primary-server
           Configure a secondary server.  primary-server  is  the
           host name of the primary server.

     -u    Unconfigure this Sun  Ray  server  for  LDAP  database
           replication.

     -z[port#]
           Update the port number with the one specified for  the
           datastore  service.   If  run  on  the  primary server
           without specifying the port number, it simply  updates
           all  the  necessary configuration files on the primary
           with the default port for the datastore  service.   If



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utreplica(8)



           run  on  the  secondary  server without specifying the
           port number, it resyncs  all  necessary  configuration
           files  on  the  secondary  server with the port number
           currently configured on the primary server.

     -A    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses                                         from
           /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_responses.props.
           If  no  entry  exists for a particular key, prompt the
           user     in     the     standard     fashion.      See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utreplica.

     -D    AIC: Use default responses,  utilizing  defaults  from
           /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/SRCS.utdialog_defaults.props.
           If no entry exists for a particular  key,  prompt  the
           user      in     the     standard     fashion.     See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys affecting utreplica.

     -n    AIC: If required to prompt the  user,  exit  with  bad
           status.

USAGE
     utreplica is used only on Sun  Ray  servers  in  a  failover
     group.  Configure the primary Sun Ray server first, then the
     secondary servers.

FILES
     The following files are configured on the  primary  Sun  Ray
     server:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/srds/current/utdsd.conf

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/srds/current/utdsd.ini

        o  /etc/services

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

     The following files are configured on the secondary Sun  Ray
     server:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/srds/current/utdsd.conf

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                        utreplica(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utconfig(8), utdialog_responses.props(5), AIC(8)

NOTES
     To replicate the LDAP  information  properly,  all  Sun  Ray
     servers  in the failover group must have the same group sig-
     nature.

     Use of the -p, -s, and -u options on a Sun Ray server inter-
     rupts all active sessions on that server.

     Please note that "interrupt" in  this  context  means  that,
     while  the  screen  will flash for approximately 30 seconds,
     all current sessions are preserved,  not  destroyed.  Active
     users  may need to remove and re-insert their smart cards to
     return  to  their  sessions.  If  a  CDE  login  screen   is
     presented, the user should select Options/Reset Login Screen
     to return to an existing session.































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utresadm.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utresadm(8)



NAME
     utresadm - manage explicit monitor resolution  settings  for
     Sun Ray.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresadm [-v vonum]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresadm -a [-v  vonum]  -c  CID  -t  token
     resname

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresadm -d [-v vonum] -c CID -t token

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresadm -p [-v vonum] [-c CID] [-t token]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresadm -o

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresadm -i

DESCRIPTION
     The utresadm command allows an  administrator  to  establish
     explicit  video  signal timings on the monitor video outputs
     of a Sun Ray desktop unit.  The video signal timing controls
     the  on-screen  resolution  and refresh rate of the attached
     monitor.

     Resolutions configured through utresadm take precedence over
     resolutions  discovered  by  the  Sun  Ray DTU through a DDC
     exchange with the monitor.  Resolutions may be specified for
     a  particular  combination  of Sun Ray DTU and access token,
     for a particular Sun Ray independent of  access  token,  and
     for  all  Sun  Ray  DTUs controlled by servers in a failover
     group.  In cases where multiple configuration records  might
     apply  to a given session, the most specific matching record
     is applied.

     utresadm with no arguments shows  the  resolution  that  has
     been  configured for the current access token in the current
     Sun Ray DTU.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    establishes the resolution resname  as  the  preferred
           resolution  for  the  given  CID, token and vonum.  If
           token is specified as the word  default  then  resname
           becomes the preferred resolution for all tokens at the
           given CID for which no explicit  resolution  has  been
           configured.   If  both  CID and token are specified as
           the word default then resname  becomes  the  preferred
           resolution for all CIDs and tokens for which no expli-
           cit resolution has been configured.   This  option  is
           available  only  to  the  superuser.   Changes  become



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utresadm(8)



           effective only after services are restarted.

     -d    deletes an explicit resolution  previously  configured
           for  the  given  CID, token and vonum.  This option is
           available  only  to  the  superuser.   Changes  become
           effective only after services are restarted.

     -p    shows the explicit resolution configured for the given
           CID,  token  and vonum.  If no token is specified then
           all configuration records for the given CID are shown.
           If  no CID is specified then all configuration records
           for the given token are shown.   If  neither  CID  nor
           token  is specified then all configuration records are
           shown.

     -o    emits (to standard output) all  configured  resolution
           records  in  a  format  suitable  for  consumption  by
           utresadm -i.

     -i    reads (from standard input) a list of resolution  con-
           figuration  records in the form emitted by utresadm -o
           and configures the  corresponding  resolutions.   This
           option is available only to the superuser.

     -c CID
           CID is the canonical ID of the Sun Ray  desktop  unit,
           or  the  word default if this operation is to apply to
           all desktop units.

     -t token
           token is the access token for the session, or the word
           default if this operation is to apply to all tokens.

     -v vonum
           vonum is the monitor video output number that is to be
           affected  by  this operation.  The first monitor video
           output on a Sun Ray DTU  is  numbered  1.   Additional
           outputs,  present  only  on  certain models of Sun Ray
           DTU, are identified by  successively  higher  numbers.
           (For  example, a Sun Ray 2FS DTU has two outputs, num-
           bered 1 and 2.)  If no vonum is specified then  output
           number 1 is assumed.

OPERANDS
     resname
           The name of a timing that  will  produce  the  desired
           resolution.   A  list  of  available  timings  may  be
           obtained from utresdef(1M).

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                         utresadm(8)



     0     if the desired activity was completed without error.

     1     if the command terminated because of  a  command  line
           syntax problem.

     2     if the Sun Ray data store was inaccessible.

     3     if the resolution  definition  (provided  on  standard
           input) was unacceptable.

FILES
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.pw

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utsettings(1), utset(1), utresdef(1M), utconfig(1M)

NOTES
     utresadm provides no assurance that the  configured  resolu-
     tion  timing  can be understood by the monitor attached to a
     Sun Ray unit; it is possible to configure a resolution  that
     can not be understood by the monitor. utsettings(1) provides
     a safer interactive means of establishing an explicit  reso-
     lution  for  the current access token on the current Sun Ray
     unit.

     utresadm is available only after utconfig(1M) has  been  run
     to activate the Sun Ray data store.

     As with anything that must go  through  the  LDAP  database,
     there  is a slight lag between the time an update is applied
     on the primary server and its propagation to  the  secondary
     server or servers; however, the length of the interval would
     normally be measured in seconds or fractions of a second.

     In addition, once a  Sun  Ray  session,  which  can  persist
     across  many logins, is attached to a given DTU, the monitor
     timing persists for the life  of  the  session  and  can  be
     changed  only by modifying the timing explicitly from within
     that session while it remains attached to that  DTU.External
     activities,  such  execution  of  utresadm -a or utresadm -d



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                         utresadm(8)



     after the session has been associated with the DTU, have  no
     effect on any existing association. However, utstart -c des-
     troys all existing sessions and thereby makes all previously
     existing  associations obsolete. As DTUs reconnect after the
     restart and are granted new sessions, the  newly  configured
     timings are applied to the new sessions as they are created.

















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utresdef.8



Sun Ray System Administration                         utresdef(8)



NAME
     utresdef -  manage monitor resolution  definitions  for  Sun
     Ray.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef resname

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef -a [-c comment] resname dimensions

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef -d resname

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef -o

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef -i

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utresdef -h

DESCRIPTION
     The utresdef command  allows  an  administrator  to  create,
     delete  and  view  resolution  definitions (actually monitor
     signal timing definitions) for monitors attached to Sun  Ray
     DTUs.

     Running utresdef(1M) with no options or arguments produces a
     summary  listing  of  all  available  resolutions.   Running
     utresdef(1M) with no options and a resname argument produces
     a  summary  listing  of  the  named resolution.  The summary
     listing shows the name  of  the  resolution,  the  on-screen
     dimensions  (WIDTHxHEIGHT)  that result from the use of this
     resolution, a flag indicating  whether  this  resolution  is
     built  in (B) to SRSS or has been locally defined (-), and a
     brief description of the resolution.

     Individual resolutions may be associated with  specific  Sun
     Ray  units  by utresadm(1M). Users may configure resolutions
     for their own personal access tokens  through  utsettings(1)
     or utset(1).

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    defines the resolution resname. This option is  avail-
           able only to the superuser.

     -d    deletes the resolution definition named resname.  This
           option is available only to the superuser.

     -o    shows all  locally-defined  resolutions  in  a  format
           suitable for consumption by utresdef -i.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                         utresdef(8)



     -i    reads (from  standard  input)  a  list  of  resolution
           definitions  in  the  form  emitted by utresdef -o and
           adds those definitions to the list of  locally-defined
           resolutions.   This  option  is  available only to the
           superuser.

     -c    a comment explaining the nature  and  purpose  of  the
           resolution being defined.

     -h    Displays the usage message for this command.

OPERANDS
     dimensions
           the dimensions, in the form WIDTHxHEIGHT, of  the  on-
           screen display that results from applying this resolu-
           tion definition to the Sun Ray desktop unit.

     resname
           the name of the resolution being defined,  deleted  or
           displayed.    resname  is  often  given  in  the  form
           WIDTHxHEIGHT@RATE (e.g. 640x480@60) but this  form  is
           not  required.   The resolution name must begin with a
           letter or a number, may contain letters,  numbers  and
           the characters '.' (period), '-' (hyphen), '_' (under-
           score), '@' (at) or '+' (plus), and must not exceed 20
           characters in length.

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     if the desired activity was completed without error.

     1     if the command terminated because of  a  command  line
           syntax problem.

     2     if the Sun Ray data store was inaccessible.

     3     if the resolution  definition  (provided  on  standard
           input) was unacceptable.

FILES
     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

     /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.pw

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:







SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                         utresdef(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utsettings(1), utset(1), utresadm(1M), utconfig(1M)

NOTES
     utresdef is available only after utconfig(1M) has  been  run
     to activate the Sun Ray data store.











































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utrestart.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utrestart(8)



NAME
     utrestart - Sun Ray utility  for  resetting  and  restarting
     services.

SYNOPSIS
     This command is deprecated. Please use utstart(8) instead.

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrestart

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrestart -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrestart -h

DESCRIPTION
     This command is deprecated. Please use utstart(8) instead.

     The utrestart command is used for resetting  and  restarting
     Sun  Ray services.  It replaces the utpolicy -i option which
     has been deprecated in 2.0.

     utrestart can only be run by the super-user.

     The utrestart command without options causes a  "warm"  res-
     tart:  Sun  Ray services are restarted and existing sessions
     are preserved.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -c    Restarts Sun Ray services.  Sessions will be lost.

     -h    Prints the usage for this command.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This resets services.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrestart

     Example 2: This restarts services.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utrestart -c

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utseriald.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utseriald(8)



NAME
     utseriald - Sun Ray DTU serial services daemon.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utseriald  [ -D debug-level ]  [ -o  optroot
     ]  [ -r ]

DESCRIPTION
     utseriald provides serial support for Sun Ray  DTUs  through
     driver  services  for USB serial adaptors.  It also provides
     support for the built-in, non-USB serial ports on  some  Sun
     Ray models.

     utseriald uses the Sun Ray serial I/O driver on solaris  and
     Sun  Ray  utio  driver  on linux to provide applications the
     same interface as standard workstation serial ports, such as
     /dev/term/a  or  /dev/term/b  on  solaris  and /dev/ttyS0 on
     linux.

     When a USB serial adaptor is attached to  a  DTU,  utseriald
     creates  device  nodes  in the $UTDEVROOT/devices directory.
     Sun Ray models with permanent, built-in  serial  ports  will
     also  have corresponding device nodes created in this direc-
     tory.

     A      user      can      use      the      device      link
     $UTDEVROOT/dev/term/terminal-name to access the serial ports
     on the Sun Ray DTU.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -D debug-level
           Debug mode. Use is beyond the scope of this document.

     -o optroot
           Use optroot as the serial service's root directory for
           device   node   creation.    The   default   value  is
           /tmp/SUNWut.  optroot should be the same directory  as
           the optroot directory used by utdevmgrd(1M).

     -r    Automatically restart the serial service daemon if  it
           exits.   With  this  option, the serial service daemon
           creates two processes: a child that performs  all  the
           actual  work,  and  a  parent monitoring process.  The
           parent process restarts a child if  the  previous  one
           exits.

FILES
     The following files are used:

     $UTDEVROOT/dev/term



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utseriald(8)



           The directory containing links to serial device  names
           for each DTU.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray DTU associated with a user's session.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utdevmgrd(1M), utparalleld(1M)




































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utsession.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utsession(8)



NAME
     utsession - List and manage the  Sun  Ray  sessions  on  the
     local Sun Ray server.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsession  -p  [ -x ]  [ -d disp# ]   [  -u
     unix ]  [ -t token ]  [ -n name ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsession  -k  [ -a ]  [ -x ]  [ -d disp# ]
     [ -u unix ] [ -t token ]  [ -n name ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsession  -l  [ -x ]  [ -d disp# ]   [  -u
     unix ]  [ -t token ]  [ -n name ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsession  -h

DESCRIPTION
     The first synopsis (-p) is used to print  Sun  Ray  sessions
     for  the specified user or token on the current server. When
     the -u, -t, -n, and  -d  options  are  not  used,  utsession
     prints all of the Sun Ray sessions on the current server.

     When listing the Sun Ray sessions, utsession also lists  the
     state for each session:

     D     Disconnected - The session is currently  not  attached
           to  any  Sun Ray.  The session is considered connected
           if this flag is omitted.

     I     Idling - A dtlogin session that is  currently  waiting
           for  user login (ie. dtgreet). User has already logged
           into the dtlogin session if the flag is omitted.

     E     Encrypted session - Session traffic is encrypted in at
           least one direction (upstream or downstream).

     A     Authenticated - The server has  authenticated  to  the
           client.

     U     Authenticated Client (Unconfirmed) -  The  client  has
           authenticated successfully to the server. Authenticity
           of the client key used has not been established.

     C     Authenticated Client  (Confirmed)  -  The  client  has
           authenticated successfully to the server. Authenticity
           of the client key used has been established.

     X     Authentication Conflict -  Multiple  conflicting  keys
           have been used for this client. Access to regular ses-
           sions is denied until the conflict  is  resolved.  Use
           utkeyadm(8) to confirm the genuine key.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utsession(8)



     The second synopsis (-k) is used to kill Sun Ray sessions on
     the  current  server.  At least one of the -d, -u, -t, or -n
     options must be specified. Unless the -a  option  is  speci-
     fied,  more than one session matching the specified criteria
     will return an error.

     The third synopsis (-l) gives detailed security  status  for
     the  specified user or token on the current server. When the
     -u,  -t,  -n,  and  -d   options  are  not  used,  utsession
     lists  detailed  security  status  for  all  terminal   CIDs
     currently  connected to the server.

     The fourth synopsis (-h) displays the usage of this command.

          Note:

          This command must be run as root.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported:

     -a    Apply the operation to all matching sessions  if  more
           than  one  matches  the  search criteria. If -a is not
           specified, multiple matching sessions return an error.

     -d disp#
           Specify the X display number for search.

     -h    Display the usage of this command.

     -k    Kill the sessions matching the  search  criteria.  You
           must  also  specify at least one of the -d, -u, -t, or
           -n options.

     -l    Gives detailed security status,  normally  a  list  of
           terminal  CIDs  currently  used by the session, listed
           under the terminalCIDs key. For multihead sessions, it
           also  displays the primary terminal CID under the pri-
           maryCID key.

     -n name
           Specify the registered Sun Ray  username  for  search.
           Sessions  belonging to users matching the username are
           listed. It is a case sensitive, exact match.

     -p    Print the sessions belonging to the specified user  or
           token.

     -t token
           Specify the Sun Ray token for search. The token is  in
           one of the following forms:




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                        utsession(8)



              o  Raw token form for unregistered smartcard  users
                 (. e.g. MicroPayflex.1234567890)

              o  Pseudo   token   form   for    terminal    users
                 (pseudo.)

              o  Logical  token  form   for    registered   users
                 (user.)

              o  Transitional token form for hotdesk  authentica-
                 tion (hotdesk.)

     -u unix
           Specify the UNIX login name for search.

     -x    RESERVED for special  handling.  This  is  invoked  by
           utrcmd(8)  to support remote operation of the Adminis-
           tration Tool interface.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command lists all sessions  on  the  current
     server.

     # utsession -p

     Example 2: This command finds the sessions for the UNIX user
     "jdoe".

     # utsession -p -u jdoe

     Example 3: This command  terminates  a  registered  Sun  Ray
     user's (john doe's) session.

     # utsession -k -n "john doe"

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Command completed successfully.

     1     Entry not found.

     -1    An error occurred.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:








SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                        utsession(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utuser(8),  auth.props(5),   utdesktop(8)   ,   utcrypto(8),
     utkeyadm(8)














































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4



utsessiond.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utsessiond(8)



NAME
     utsessiond - Sun Ray session manager daemon.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utsessiond  [ -a authlist ]  [ -c authfile ]
     [ -d ]  [ -h hostname ]  [ -p port ]  [ -P nport ]  [ -r ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utsessiond daemon provides a reliable  rendezvous  point
     for  services in a Sun Ray session. It acts as an intermedi-
     ary to forward session connection and disconnection messages
     from  the Sun Ray authentication manager to the services and
     provides facilities for supporting distributed  synchroniza-
     tion of clip-lists for the services.

     If either the -a or the -c options is specified, the session
     manager  daemon  operates  exclusively in call-back mode. In
     this mode, the session manager only  takes  session  connect
     and  disconnect  commands  from authentication managers that
     are explicitly enabled by authlist or authfile and that have
     requested  a  call-back.   The  call-back feature provides a
     mechanism by which the session manager and  the  authentica-
     tion manager may establish each other's identity.

     Error messages from utsessiond are  logged  using  syslog(3)
     with a facility value of LOG_DAEMON.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a authlist
           Add the host and port pairs specified in  authlist  to
           the  list  of  permitted  Authentication Managers. The
           format of  authlist  is  a  comma  separated  list  of
           hostname:port pairs.

     -c authfile
           Add the host and port pairs  specified  in  the  ASCII
           file  authfile to the list of permitted Authentication
           Managers. The file contains a list  of  Authentication
           Manager  specifications,  one per line. The specifica-
           tions take the form  of  hostname  followed  by   port
           number,  separated by white-space. Blank lines and any
           line whose first  printable  character  is  ``#''  are
           ignored.

     -d    Enable debugging output.

     -h hostname
           Set the hostname portion of the session IDs  generated
           by  the  Session  Manager  to  the  specified hostname
           value. By default this is set to  the  machine's  node



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                       utsessiond(8)



           name.  This  option can be used to handle servers sup-
           porting multiple IP addresses as part of a  clustering
           solution.

     -p port
           Set the Session Manager's listen port to the specified
           port value. The default is port 7007. This is the port
           by which session services and Authentication  Managers
           contact the Session Manager.

     -P nport
           This option is no longer used. Retained only for back-
           ward compatibility.

     -r    Automatically restart the Session Manager daemon if it
           exits.  With  this  option  the Session Manager daemon
           will create two processes: a child that  performs  all
           the  actual  work  and  parent monitoring process. The
           parent process will restart a child  if  the  previous
           one exits.

FILES
     The following file is used:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/auth.permit


     The customary location of the authfile for a system.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utauthd(1M), syslog(3), syslogd(1M), syslog.conf(4)














SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utsetup.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utsetup(8)



NAME
     utsetup - SRS Installation and Configuration Management

SYNOPSIS
     /cdrom/cdrom0/utsetup [-a [-D dialog_responses_dir]] [-d]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsetup [-a] [-d]

DESCRIPTION
     The utsetup command can be used to walk through the  process
     of  installation  and/or configuration of SRS. It produces a
     set of files (see utdialog_responses.props(5)) that  can  be
     used  with  utsetup subsequently on another system to repro-
     duce the configuration.

     When the Download Image utsetup is run with no  options,  it
     will walk the user through the process of installing, confi-
     guring, activating, and starting up SRS.  The  configuration
     which   results  will  be  a  commonly  used  configuration,
     (optionally) allowing LAN-based Sun Ray clients  to  connect
     to  the  server (using utadm -L on) and configuring firmware
     (using utfwadm -A -a -V). The user will be prompted for  the
     installation  and  configuration  parameters  and  all  user
     responses will be stored  in  /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d  in
     utdialog_responses.props  files. Note that if an HA group is
     indicated you will be prompted to enter a  list  of  Primary
     and  Secondary  hostnames. The host will then self-configure
     replication appropriately depending on which list it is  on,
     and  the  resultant  utdialog_responses.props can be used to
     auto-configure other members of the HA group as well.

     Once utsetup has been run on a given system, the contents of
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d  may  be copied to a directory on
     another system, and the Download Image utsetup  may  be  run
     with the -a -D dialog_responses_dir options to reproduce the
     same configuration on that system.

     If installation is performed  separately  (e.g.  jumpstart),
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsetup  can be run. It will behave identi-
     cally to the Download Image version except that the  instal-
     lation phase will be skipped, and there is no option to pick
     up    dialog    files    from    anyplace     other     than
     /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/.  If  the Download Image utsetup
     is run, there is no  need  to  run  /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utsetup
     separately.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    AIC:  Use  previously-specified  responses,  utilizing
           responses  from the utdialog_responses.props files. If
           no entry exists for a particular key, prompt the  user



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                          utsetup(8)



           in        the        standard       fashion.       See
           utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specification of the
           most significant keys.

     -d    AIC: Use default responses,  utilizing  defaults  from
           the  utdialog_defaults.props files. If no entry exists
           for a particular key, prompt the user in the  standard
           fashion. See utdialog_responses.props(5) for a specif-
           ication of the most significant keys.

     -D dialog_dir
           AIC:  Read  AIC  utdialog_responses.props  files  from
           dialog_dir,  and  copy them into the standard location
           after product installation.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Install SRS,  configure  it,  start  it  up,  and
     create utdialog_responses.props files

     # utsetup

     ==================================================================
     === Installing Sun Ray Software - utinstall ===

     
     Accept? (Y/N) y
     # utinstall   Version: 4.3     Sun Nov 28 09:01:04 PST 2010

     Sun Ray Server Software                  installed
     Sun Ray Data Store 3.2                   not installed
     Kiosk Mode 4.3                           not installed
     Enter Java v1.6 (or later) location: [/usr/java]

     About to carry out the following operations:

     Upgrade    [ Sun Ray Server Software  to 4.3  ]
     Install    [ Sun Ray Data Store 3.2 ]
     Install    [ Sun Ray Server Software 4.3 French Admin GUI ]
     Install    [ Sun Ray Server Software 4.3 Japanese Admin GUI ]
     Install    [ Sun Ray Server Software 4.3 Simplified Chinese Admin GUI ]
     Install    [ Sun Ray Server Software 4.3  ]
     Install    [ Kiosk Mode 4.3 ]
     Install    [ Kiosk Mode 4.3 localized files ]
     Install    [ data for utslaunch ]
     Install    [ Sun Ray Server Software 4.3 modules for utsunmc ]
     Install    [ Service Tags 1.1 ]
     Continue? (Y/N) [Y]

     Installing Sun Ray Server Software version 4.3 ...

     




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                          utsetup(8)



     Installation of Sun Ray Server Software has completed.

     Please check for errors/warnings in

         /var/adm/log/utinstall.2010_11_28_09:01:04.log

     +++ Done.

     ==================================================================
     === Activating Sun Ray Software - utctl
     ### successfully installed Sun Ray audio pseudo driver (utadem)
     ### successfully installed Sun Ray serial port pseudo driver (utserial)
     ### successfully installed Sun Ray parallel port pseudo driver (utparallel)
     ### successfully installed Sun Ray pseudo driver
     svccfg: Taking "initial" snapshot for svc:/application/utsvtreg:default.
     svccfg: Taking "last-import" snapshot for svc:/application/utsvtreg:default.
     svccfg: Refreshed svc:/application/utsvtreg:default.
     svccfg: Successful import.
     svc:/application/utsvtreg:default enabled.


     ==================================================================
     === Creating directory structure - utacleanup

     ==================================================================
     === Performing basic configuration - utconfig

     Configuration of Sun Ray Server Software

     This script automates the configuration of the Sun Ray Server Software
     and related software products.  Before proceeding, you should have read
     the Sun Ray Server Software 4.3 Installation Guide and filled out the
     Configuration Worksheet.  This script will prompt you for the values
     you filled out on the Worksheet.  For your convenience, default values
     (where applicable) are shown in brackets.
     Continue? (Y/N) [Y]
     Enter admin password:
     Again: Enter admin password:

     Configure Sun Ray Web Administration? (Y/N) [N] y
     Enter Apache Tomcat installation directory [/opt/apache-tomcat]
     Enter HTTP port number [1660]
     Enable secure connections? (Y/N) [Y]
     Enter HTTPS port number [1661]
     Enter Tomcat process username [utwww]
     Enable remote server administration? (Y/N) [N]

     Configure Sun Ray Kiosk Mode? (Y/N) [N]

     Configure this server for a failover group? (Y/N) [N]

     About to configure the following software products:



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                          utsetup(8)



     Sun Ray Data Store 3.2
         Hostname: srstb-s10
         Sun Ray root entry: o=utdata
         Sun Ray root name: utdata
         Sun Ray utdata admin password: (not shown)
         SRDS 'rootdn': cn=admin,o=utdata

     Sun Ray Web Administration hosted at Apache Tomcat/5.5.20
         Apache Tomcat installation directory: /opt/apache-tomcat
         HTTP port number: 1660
         HTTPS port number: 1661
         Tomcat process username: utwww
         Remote server administration: Enabled

     Sun Ray Server Software 4.3
         Failover group: no
         Sun Ray Kiosk Mode: no
     Continue? (Y/N) [Y]

     

     Configuration of Sun Ray Server Software has completed.  Please check
     the log file, /var/adm/log/utconfig.2010_11_28_09:01:46.log, for errors.

     ==================================================================
     === Enabling LAN access and configuring basic .parms files - utadm/utfwadm
     ### Turning on Sun Ray LAN connection

     CoronaP1     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     SunRayP10    4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     CoronaP2     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     CoronaP3     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     CoronaP4     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     CoronaP5     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     CoronaP6     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     CoronaP7     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     SunRayP8     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     SunRayP9     4.3_18_2010.08.25.22.33
     ### Successfully enabled tftp for firmware downloads

     ==================================================================
     === Configuring access policy - utpolicy
     Enter policy line as if on utpolicy command line: [-a -g -z both]

     ==================================================================
     === Starting Sun Ray Software - utstart
     A cold restart has been initiated... messages will be logged to /var/opt/SUNWut/log/messages.

     Example 2: Automatically install SRS, configure  it  identi-
     cally to Example 1, and start it up





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray System Administration                          utsetup(8)



     First, copy all of /var/opt/SUNWut/utdialog.d/* to  the  new
     system's /tmp directory.

     # utsetup -a -D /tmp
     Similar output will  be  generated,  but  without  any  user
     interaction.

FILES
     The following files are used:

        o  /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/*.utdialog_prompts.props

        o  /opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/*.utdialog_defaults.props

        o  /var/opt/SUNWut/lib/utdialog.d/*.utdialog_responses.props

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Error

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuti                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utdialog_responses.props(5), AIC(8), Sun Ray Server Software
     Administrator's Guide



















SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5



utslaunch.8



Sun Ray System Administration                        utslaunch(8)



NAME
     utslaunch - Sun Ray DTU launch application.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utslaunch

DESCRIPTION
     The utslaunch application is used to launch various Sun  Ray
     applications  via  a  "hotkey" key combination. The applica-
     tions are enabled when the key combination is pressed.

     The  utslaunch  application  provides  hotkey  functionality
     while consuming fewer system resources.

     Hotkey    key    combinations    are    defined    in    the
     utslaunch.properties files.

OPTIONS
     There are no options for utslaunch.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command starts the utslaunch daemon  in  the
     background.

     # utslaunch &

FILES
     The following files are used for hotkey configuration:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_defaults.properties


     site-wide defaults

        o  ~/.utslaunch.properties


     user's defaults

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utslaunch_mandatory.properties


     site-wide mandatory defaults

     The following file is used:

     /usr/dt/config/Xsession.d/0100.SUNWut

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     utslaunch uses the DISPLAY environment variable to  get  the
     user's X display number.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                        utslaunch(8)



     It also uses the HOME environment variable to get the user's
     home directory to be able to use user's hotkey settings.

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utslaunch.properties(4), utsettings(1), utdetach(1)

































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utstart.8



Sun Ray System Administration                          utstart(8)



NAME
     utstart - Sun Ray utility for resetting and restarting  ser-
     vices.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart -h

DESCRIPTION
     The utstart command is used for resetting and restarting Sun
     Ray  services.  It replaces the utpolicy -i option which has
     been deprecated in 2.0.

     utstart can only be run by the super-user.

     The utstart command without options causes a "warm" restart:
     Sun  Ray  services  are  restarted and existing sessions are
     preserved.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -c    Restarts Sun Ray services.  Sessions will be lost.

     -h    Prints the usage for this command.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This resets services.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart

     Example 2: This restarts services.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstart -c

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|









SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utstop.8



Sun Ray System Administration                           utstop(8)



NAME
     utstop - Sun Ray utility for  stopping  and  disabling  ser-
     vices.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstop

DESCRIPTION
     The utstop command is used for stopping Sun Ray services and
     disabling  them so that they will not automatically start up
     upon reboot.

     utstop can only be run by the super-user.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This stops and disables services.

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utstop

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utstart(8)
























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1



utstoraged.8



Sun Ray System Administration                       utstoraged(8)



NAME
     utstoraged - Sun Ray Mass Storage service daemon

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/lib/utstoraged [ -D  debug-level]  [-o  optroot]
     [-r]

DESCRIPTION
     utstoraged provides mass storage support for Sun  Ray  DTUs.
     utstoraged   supplies  driver  services for USB mass storage
     devices that comply with the  USB  Bulk  Only  Mass  Storage
     Specification 1.0.

     utstoraged uses the utdisk(4) loopback driver to  provide  a
     block  device  interface to Linux applications. Applications
     can access Sun Ray  storage  devices  through  block  device
     links   created   in   the   $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk   directory.
     utstoraged interacts with the mounter  daemon,  utmountd(8),
     to mount devices containing OS-recognizable filesystems.

     Users have access rights only to storage  devices  connected
     to the Sun Ray DTU on which their session is active and only
     for as long as the session is active. When  the  session  is
     disconnected  from  the Sun Ray DTU through logout, hotdesk-
     ing, server switching, or any other means, ownership of  the
     storage  device  is  lost and all pending data transfers are
     aborted. This can result in corruption of the filesystem  on
     the media and loss of data.

          Note:

          Users are strongly advised to use the utdiskadm(8) com-
          mand  to  prepare the device for removal before discon-
          necting a session.  On Linux, writes to  some  filesys-
          tems  are  asynchronous.  If  the  device  is unplugged
          without unmounting  the  filesystem  first,  some  data
          could get lost.

     Error         messages         are         logged         to
     /var/opt/SUNWut/log/utstoraged.log

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported:

               -D debug-level

               Debug mode. Use is beyond the scope of this  docu-
               ment.  If a debug level is set, debug messages are
               sent to stderr.

                -o optroot




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                       utstoraged(8)



               Use  optroot  as  the  parallel  service's    root
               directory  for  device   node   creation.  optroot
               should be  the  same  directory   as  the  optroot
               directory used by utdevmgrd(8).

               -r

               Automatically restart the storage  service  daemon
               if  it exits.  With this  option, the storage ser-
               vice daemon creates two processes:  a  child  that
               performs   all   the actual  work,  and  a  parent
               monitoring process. The parent process restarts  a
               child if  the  previous
                one exits.

FILES
     The following files are used:

               $UTDEVROOT/dev/dsk

               The directory  containing  links  to  block   dev-
               ice  names   for   each  slice or partition on the
               device.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     UTDEVROOT points to a symbolic link of the device  root  for
     the Sun Ray DTU associated with a user's session.

SEE ALSO
     utdiskadm(8), utmountd(8), utdevmgrd(8), utdisk(4)

























SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utusbadm.8



Sun Ray device administration                         utusbadm(8)



NAME
     /opt/Sun Ray/sbin/utusbadm  -  Enable or disable USB  device
     services

SYNOPSIS
DESCRIPTION
     Note that utusbadm  command  is  deprecated.   Use  /opt/Sun
     Ray/sbin/utdevadm command to enable/disable usb services.

     The utusbadm ommand is used to disable/enable  access to all
     USB ports on Sun Ray devices. It does not affect HID devices
     such as the keyboard and mouse; however, it does affect  all
     other  devices  attached to the USB ports, which will not be
     accessible if the site is so configured.

     This is a site-wide property. When set, it affects all units
     connected to the failover group.

     Changing this configuration requires a cold  system  restart
     before it can take effect. When a successful change is made,
     the command reminds the administrator to  restart  the  ser-
     vices.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -h    Print the current usage state.

     -e    Enable all USB device services.

     -d    Disable all USB device services.

ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
     None

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     on success

     1     on error

FILES
     None

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:







SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray device administration                         utusbadm(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Public Evolving             |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utstart(8), utdevadm(8)














































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



utuser.8



Sun Ray System Administration                           utuser(8)



NAME
     utuser - Sun Ray user administration utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser    -a   "tokenID,server-name,server-
     port,name,other-info"  [ -r tokenreader ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -a    -f  filename   [  -r  token-
     reader ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser    -a    -i   current-tokenID   new-
     tokenID  [ -r token-reader ]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -d tokenID

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -d   -f filename

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -d   -i current-tokenID

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser    -e   "tokenID,server-name,server-
     port,name,other-info"

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -e   -f filename

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser    -e    -i  current-tokenID   [ena-
     bledisable]

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -h

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -l

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -l   -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -l   -i substring

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -l    -n substring

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -L

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -L   -c

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -L   -i substring

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -L    -n substring

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -L   -g

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -L   -s session-type

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -o





SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                           utuser(8)



     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -p tokenID

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser   -r token-reader

DESCRIPTION
     The utuser command allows the administrator to manage  users
     registered  on  the Sun Ray server where the command is run.
     The information that utuser provides is  from  the  Sun  Ray
     administration  database  and  the  Sun  Ray  Authentication
     Manager.

     utuser operations that only display information may  be  run
     by  any  user. Operations that change or delete data are run
     under superuser privileges.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    Add user with the specified tokenID, servername,  ser-
           verport, name and other information properties.

           The 5 comma-delimited values should be enclosed within
           quotes.   All  values  except  tokenID  and  name  are
           optional, although comma separators are required  (for
           example ",,,,").  The backslash charac-
           ter ("\") should not be used in any value.

     -a -f Batch add multiple users, using input from the  speci-
           fied  filename.   The format of each line in the input
           file  is:   tokenID,server-name,serverport,name,other-
           info.    All   values  except  tokenID  and  name  are
           optional, although comma separators are required  (for
           example ",,,,").

     -a -i Add  the  specified  new-tokenID  to  the  user   that
           currently has token current-tokenID.

     -d    Delete the user with the specified tokenID. This  com-
           mand  deletes  the  user and all of the user's tokens.
           (To delete a single token without deleting  the  user,
           use the -di option.)

     -d -f Batch delete multiple  users,  using  input  from  the
           specified  filename.  The  format  of each line in the
           input file is:  tokenID. However, you may use the out-
           put  of  the  -o option as input to this option as all
           arguments after the first comma are ignored. For  each
           tokenID   specified  in  the  filename,  this  command
           deletes the associated user  and  all  of  the  user's
           tokens. (To delete a single token without deleting the
           user, use the -di option.)




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                           utuser(8)



     -d -i Delete  token  current-tokenID  from  the  user   that
           currently has ownership of it. The token to be deleted
           must not be the user's only token. This  command  does
           not delete the user or any of the user's other tokens.
           (To delete the user and all the user's tokens, use the
           -d option.)

     -e    Edit properties for the user with the  specified  tok-
           enID  by  changing  the server-name, server-port, name
           and  other-information  properties  to  the  specified
           values.

           The 5 comma-delimited values should be enclosed within
           quotes.   All  values  except  tokenID  and  name  are
           optional, although comma separators are required  (for
           example ",,,,").

     -e -f Batch edit multiple users, using input from the speci-
           fied  filename.  The  format of each line in the input
           file is:   tokenID,server-name,server-port,name,other-
           info.    All   values  except  tokenID  are  optional,
           although comma separators are  required  (for  example
           ",,,,").

     -e -i Enable or disable the specified current-tokenID.

     -h    Show usage information (this message).

     -l    List all users registered in the admin database..

     -l -c List all users registered in the admin  database  that
           are currently logged in.

     -l -i List all users registered in the admin  database  with
           tokenIDs that contain the specified substring.

     -l -n List all users registered in the admin  database  with
           names that contain the specified substring.

     -L    List all users registered in the admin database  (long
           format).

     -L -c List all users registered in the admin  database  that
           are currently logged in (long format).

     -L -i List all users registered in the admin  database  with
           tokenIDs  that  contain  the specified substring (long
           format).

     -L -n List all users registered in the admin  database  with
           names  that contain the specified substring (long for-
           mat).



SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3






Sun Ray System Administration                           utuser(8)



     -L -g List  all  users  registered  in  the  admin  database
           currently  logged  in  and the servers into which they
           are logged in.

     -L -s List all users registered in the admin  database  with
           session  types  matching  the  specified session-type,
           which can be either "default",  "kiosk"  or  "regular"
           (long format).

     -o    Dump user list in comma-delimited format.  The  format
           of  each  line  output  by  this  option  is: tokenID,
           server-name, server-port, name, and other-info.

     -p    Show user properties for user with the specified  tok-
           enID.

     -r    When specified alone, this option reads a tokenID from
           the  specified  token  reader. When specified with the
           -a, -af or -ai options, the -r flag  instructs  utuser
           to  use the specified token reader to read the tokenID
           and use it wherever the character "x" is used in place
           of  a  tokenID.  The command will prompt you to insert
           the token into the specified reader when its ready  to
           read the token.

     For the -l -i, -l -n, -L -i, and -L  -n  options,  the  sub-
     string comparisons are case-insensitive.

EXAMPLES
     Example  1:  This  command  displays  all  users  that  have
     "parker" in their usernames:

     % /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser -l -n parker

     Example 2: This command adds a user  with  unknown  tokenID,
     server name "localhost", server port "7007", user name "John
     Anderson", and other information "C987" by using  the  token
     reader 08002086e18f to read the tokenID:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser -a "x,localhost,7007,John Anderson,C987"
     -r 08002086e18f

     Example 3: This command adds  multiple  users,  using  input
     from the /tmp/users file:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser -a -f /tmp/users

     Example 4: This command reads  a  token  from  token  reader
     08002086e18f:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utuser -r 08002086e18f




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          4






Sun Ray System Administration                           utuser(8)



FILES
     The following file is used:

        o  /etc/opt/SUNWut/utadmin.conf

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuta                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utdesktop(1M), utadmin.conf(4)

NOTES
     The -G option has been deprecated in favor of  using  utuser
     -L -g.


































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          5



utwall.8



Sun Ray System Administration                           utwall(8)



NAME
     utwall - Sun Ray user notification utility.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwall   -a aufile  [ -r n ]  [ -v ]  { ALL
     | user [ :display ]   | :display ... }

     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwall   [ -d ]  [ -m  "subject"  ]   [  -t
     "message-text"  ]   [  -v  ]  {  ALL | user [ :display ]   |
     :display

DESCRIPTION
     utwall sends a message or an audio file to users  having  an
     Xserver  process.  The  messages can be sent in email and/or
     displayed in a pop-up window. When sent to a multihead  ses-
     sion, the pop-up window will appear on all displays for that
     session.

     Options -a and -d require superuser privileges.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a aufile
           Annunciate mode. Plays the audio file  aufile  on  the
           specified  user's  X  session. Audio files of type .au
           can be found at /usr/demo/SOUND/sounds.

     -d    Pop up a window with  the  supplied  message  on  each
           Xserver instance.

     -m subject
           Send mail with the given subject  "subject"  and  sup-
           plied  message.  If the text has white space, use sin-
           gle or double quotes. Substitution is supported.

     -r n  Repeat the annunciation n times. This option can  only
           be used with -a. Default is 1.

     -t message-text
           Message text. Alternatively, the message can  be  sup-
           plied  as stdin. If the text has white space, use sin-
           gle or double quotes.  Substitution is supported.

     -v    Verbose mode.

OPERANDS
     The following operands are supported:

          ALL   Action is performed on all user having an Xserver
                process.




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray System Administration                           utwall(8)



          user:display
                Action is performed on the given users  (optional
                display  number  display)  having an Xserver pro-
                cess.

          :display
                Action is performed on the users  having  display
                number display.


EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This command sends email to all users:

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwall -m 'System policy change...' \
           -t 'Tonight\nPlease log off' ALL

     The email reads:

     Subject: System policy change...
     Tonight
     Please log off

     Example 2: This command pops a window  up  on  all  sessions
     stating "Log off now!"

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwall -d -t "Log off now!" ALL

     Example 3: This command pops a window up on jsmith's session
     on display 26 with the text from messagefile

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwall -d jsmith:26 < messagefile

     Example 4: This command pops a window up with a greeting  to
     the user on display number 10

     # /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwall -d -t "Hello" :10

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     wall(1M), mailx(1M), utaudio(1)

NOTES




SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2






Sun Ray System Administration                           utwall(8)



     When Sun Ray DTUs are configured for Xinerama, only the ori-
     gin screen displays the utwall message.





















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          3



utwho.8



Sun Ray User Commands                                    utwho(8)



NAME
     utwho - Provide a compact summary of sessions  and  firmware
     maintenance.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utwho   -c  [ -a ]  [ -H ]

DESCRIPTION
     The utwho command is a  script  that  assembles  information
     about   display  number,  token,  and  logged-in  user,  and
     displays that information in a compact format.  It can  also
     display  the IP address, Sun Ray model, and MAC address of a
     Sun Ray that is connected to a given session.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -c    With utwho, show connected Sun Rays with  the  display
           number,  session   token,  logged in user, IP address,
           Sun Ray model, and Sun Ray MAC address.  The   display
           number  is presented in the form d.m, where d is the X
           display number of the session, and  m  is  the   index
           within  a  multihead  group  of  that  particular  Sun
           Ray.The   session    token    is    the    value    of
           $SUN_SUNRAY_TOKEN  within a session. The model and MAC
           address are output as PxB.MAC, where Px is the  ending
           part   of  the model type, e.g., P4, and MAC is the 6-
           byte  ethernet  MAC  address  in  hexadecimal  format.
           Without  the  -c  option, the   command displays  only
           session  information, including the X display  number,
           token,  and  logged  in user.  In  this mode, sessions
           are displayed even if they don't have a Sun  Ray  con-
           nected to them.

     -a    In combination with other options, this  option   con-
           trols   the  selection   of  Sun  Rays  or sessions to
           display. Without -a, only sessions that have logged in
           users are displayed. With -a, all sessions or Sun Rays
           are displayed, and those with no logged in user have a
           user id field of "????".

     -H    Output column headings above the regular output.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:









SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          1






Sun Ray User Commands                                    utwho(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWuto                     |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     utfwadm(1M), attributes(5)















































SRSS 4.3                  Last change:                          2



Sun Ray Windows Connector Man Pages

uttsc.1






























































Sun Ray Connector_2.4                                           1






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



NAME
     uttsc - A Remote Desktop Services client  for  the  Sun  Ray
     environment.

SYNOPSIS
     uttsc [options] server

DESCRIPTION
     uttsc is a Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) client that enables
     users  to launch and use Windows applications from a Sun Ray
     desktop.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a application
          Launch the remote desktop with the  specified  applica-
          tion.

     -b   Disable the  desktop  pulldown  header  in  full-screen
          mode.  This  option  can  only be used when full screen
          mode (-m) is specified.

     -c working folder
          Needs -a provided as well. Applications specified  with
          -a launch from the folder specified with -c.

     -d domain
          Domain for authentication. Needs -u provided as well.

     -e Timeout
          Specify the timeout (in seconds)  for  establishing  an
          RDP  session on the remote desktop server after the TCP
          connection has been  established  (see  -t).   If  this
          value  is  not  specified or Timeout is set to zero, no
          timeout will be in force.

     -g [+|-+|-]
          Width and height specify size of  Connector  window.  X
          offset specifies distance of top left corner of Connec-
          tor Window from left edge of  screen  if  positive  and
          distance  from  right  edge  of  screen  if negative. Y
          offset specifies distance of top left corner of Connec-
          tor window from top edge of screen if positive and dis-
          tance from right edge of screen if  negative.   The  -g
          option can not be provided together with the -m option.

     -h   Display complete usage of this command.

     -i   Read password from STDIN. It prompts for password  with
          echo  off  if  STDIN  is  a TTY, otherwise no prompt is
          displayed.  This   option   can   only  be  used   when



Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     1






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



          username  option (-u) is specified and -p option is not
          used.

     -k keyboard
          Specify the keyboard type to be used  for  the  connec-
          tion. The supported values for keyboard are sun(type6),
          sun(type6jp) and  sun(kr).   The  default  keyboard  is
          "sun(type6)".  All  Sun  and PC USB keyboards should be
          supported by this default value, apart from  Sun  type6
          Japanese,  the  Sun  Korean  keyboard and the PC Korean
          keyboard. The sun(type6jp) value is used  for  the  Sun
          type6  Japanese keyboard. The sun(kr) value is used for
          the Sun Korean keyboard and the PC Korean keyboard.

     -l locale
          Specify the locale to be used for  the  remote  desktop
          session. If this option is not specified, the LC_ALL or
          the LANG environment variable values are used. If these
          are  not  set,  then  "en-US"  is  the  default locale.
          Locales can be specified in  the  RFC1766  format,  eg:
          German is de-DE, Swiss French is fr-CH etc.

     -m   Enable fullscreen  mode.   This  overrides  the  window
          manager  and  causes  the  uttsc client window to fully
          cover the  current  screen.  It  can  not  be  provided
          together with the -g option.

     -n client name
          Specify a name to be used for this client. The DTU  mac
          address is used as the default.

     -O   Deprecated. Same as -H nodisconnect.

     -H action on hotdesking

     -H nodisconnect
          Hotdesking the Sun Ray session does not disconnect  and
          restart the RDP session.  Previously the -O option.

     -H reconnect
          If the remote desktop server is  configured  in  Device
          Client  Access License Mode, the remote desktop session
          gets disconnected and reestablished when  the  Sun  Ray
          session  gets moved to a different client.  This is the
          default mode.

     -H autoreconnect
          Hotdesking the  Sun  Ray  session  always  updates  the
          client   information  on  the  remote  desktop  server.
          Requires auto-reconnect.

     -p   Read password from  controlling  TTY.  It  prompts  for



Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     2






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



          password with echo off. This  option  can  only be used
          when username option (-u) is specified and -i option is
          not used.

     -r device
          Allow device redirection of  specified  device  on  the
          client for access on the server.  The devices currently
          allowed are :

     -r comport:=,...
          Redirects serial devices on your client to the server.

     -r disk:=,...
          Redirects a path to the share  \\tsclient\
          on the server.

     -r printer:[=],...
          Redirects a printer queue on the client to the  server.
          The    is  the  name  of the queue in your
          local system.  defaults to a simple  postscript
          driver unless you specify one. The first printer on the
          command line will be set as your  default  printer.  If
          the driver name has white spaces, it must be quoted.

     -r sound:[low|high|off|remote]
          Disable sound output redirection from the server to the
          client,  or change the quality of transmitted sound, or
          allow the sound output to play  on  remote  host.   The
          sound  output quality can be specified in terms of bits
          per second:  A "low" quality transmits at  8kHz  and  a
          "high"  quality  at  22.05  kHz or higher.  By default,
          High quality sound output is enabled and plays locally.

     -r soundin:[low|medium|high|off]
          Enable sound input redirection from the client  to  the
          server  and select the quality of transmitted sound.  A
          "low" quality transmits at a maximum 8kHz, "medium"  at
          up to 22.05kHz and "high" at the highest available sam-
          ple rate.  By default, sound input redirection is  dis-
          abled.

     -r scard:on
          Enable  Smart  Card  redirection  from  client  to  the
          server.   By  default,  Smart  Card redirection is dis-
          abled.

     -s   Connects to the console session of a server.

     -t Timeout
          Specify the TCP connection  timeout  (in  seconds)  for
          establishing a connection to the remote desktop server.
          If this value is not specified or the Timeout value  is



Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     3






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



          set  to zero, the system default value for the TCP con-
          nection timeout period will be used.

     -u username
          Username to use for authentication on the server.

     -v   Display version information of the uttsc command  line.
          It can not be provided together with any other option.

     -w windowid
          Embed uttsc window in another window. The windowid  can
          be decimal or hexadecimal (prefixed by 0x).

     -x XDisplay
          Specify the X display to launch  the  session  on.  The
          DISPLAY  environment  variable is used to determine the
          display when this option is not used.

     -z   Disable RDP packet data compression. This is enabled by
          default.

     -A color depth
          Sets the colour depth for the connection (8, 15, 16, 24
          or  32).  The colour depth may be limited by the server
          configuration in which case the server configuration is
          honored.

     -C   Use shared colourmap. By default, private  colormap  is
          used.

     -D   Disables the Video and Adobe  Flash  Acceleration  path
          for Windows 7 and Windows 2008 R2.

     -E window-attribute
          Enable window attributes from  the  defined  set.   The
          available  set  of  options  which can be enabled are :
          wallpaper,  fullwindowdrag,  menuanimations,   theming,
          cursorshadow,  cursorsettings,  fontsmoothing.  Keeping
          these attributes disabled improves display  performance
          especially  over lower bandwidth networks.  Multiple -E
          options can be specified for more than one attribute if
          required.

     -K   Handle shortcuts in the local computer desktop session.
          If  not  specified  then  shortcuts  are handled in the
          remote desktop session. This option cannot be  used  in
          full screen mode.

     -P port
          Specify the port over which  to  connect  to  RDP.  The
          default port is 3389.




Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     4






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



     -S Timeout
          Specify the TCP connection socket keep  alive  interval
          (in  seconds)  for the connection to the remote desktop
          server. If this value is not specified or  the  Timeout
          value  is set to zero, the system default value for the
          TCP keep alive interval period will be used.

     -T window title
          Set the title on the client window. This option  cannot
          be used when -b is specified in full screen mode.

     -M [off|all|xvideo|xvenc]
          Specify which accelerated media paths to use (supported
          only with Windows XP and Windows 2003).

          off - Disable all accelerated media paths.  Media  will
          be rendered through the RDP protocol.

          all - Enable all accelerated media paths. This  is  the
          default value.

          xvideo  -  Enable  the  Xvideo  extension   usage   for
          accelerated YUV support.

          xvenc  -  Enable  the   XvEnc   extension   usage   for
          accelerated H.264/VC-1 support.

     -R 
          Adjust the TCP receiver buffer size in  bytes.  Default
          value  is  8192  bytes.   Decreasing  the  TCP receiver
          buffer size  increases  desktop  responsiveness  during
          large  desktop  updates.  8192 is the optimal value for
          these scenarios.

     -X [:]
          Specify which multi-monitor enumeration methods  should
          be used to inform the RDP server of available monitors.

          xinerama - Enumerate monitors using the Xinerama exten-
          sion.

          xrandr - Enumerate monitors using the Xrandr extension.

          off - Disable multi-monitor enumeration.

          If this option is not specified, multi-monitor enumera-
          tion  is enabled, and the Xinerama extension is used to
          enumerate monitors.

     -U retries
          Specify the number of attempts to automatically  recon-
          nect   to  a  remote  desktop  server  when  a  network



Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     5






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



          connection fails (default: 6).   Reconnection  attempts
          will  be  made  on  an  exponential back-off timer. The
          remote desktop service must support  auto-reconnect.  A
          value of 0 prevents any attempt to automatically recon-
          nect. The -S option may also be required to detect net-
          work failure.

     -F off|x11|xvideo|all|keep
          Specify which  flash  acceleration  paths  to  use  and
          allows  to  set  the  flash state to it's initial state
          when session is disconnected. The following  paths  are
          supported  (from  fastest  to  slowest): XvEnc, Xvideo,
          X11. At any given time the X server can support  a  set
          number  of  concurrent  Xvideo  or  Xvenc  acceleration
          paths. With the 'keep' value provided, flash  accelera-
          tion  keeps the selected acceleration path when the Sun
          Ray session is disconnected. Without  'keep'  it  falls
          back  to  non-accelerated rendering over the RDP proto-
          col.

          off - Disable all flash acceleration  paths.  Flash  is
          rendered through the RDP protocol.

          x11 - Enable flash acceleration through the X11 API.

          xvideo - Enable flash acceleration through  the  Xvideo
          extension.  If  the  number of accelerated flash (flash
          displayed in the supported browsers) exceeds the number
          of  Xvideo  accelerated paths supported by the X server
          then render the largest flash through Xvideo (up to the
          X server limit) and render the rest through X11.

          all - Enable  all  flash  acceleration  paths.  If  the
          number  of  accelerated  flash  (flash displayed in the
          supported  browsers)  exceeds  the  number   of   XvEnc
          accelerated paths supported by the X server then render
          the largest flash through XvEnc (up  to  the  X  server
          limit)  and  render  the  rest through X11. This is the
          default behavior.

          keep - Keep flash  acceleration  to  use  the  selected
          acceleration  path  when the Sun Ray session is discon-
          nected. This option can be used along with other  Flash
          options. This option can be combined along with another
          option  by  comma-separating  them   for   example   -F
          xvideo,keep.


     -N on|off
          Enable or disable enhanced network  security  (default:
          on)




Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     6






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



          on - If supported by the remote desktop  service,  con-
          nections  will  use TLS or CredSSP. Otherwise they will
          use RDP Security.

          off - RDP Security will be used.


     -j VerifyPeer:[on|off],...
          Enable or disable SSL peer verification (default:off)


     -j CAfile:,...
          Specify a PEM file containing certificates  of  trusted
          certification  authorities (CA). Only peer certificates
          signed by one of the authorities in the default openssl
          cert  store,  this  file or the direcory specified by a
          CApath option argument will be accepted if peer verifi-
          cation is enabled.


     -j CApath:,...
          Specify a directory containing certificates of  trusted
          certification  authorities (CA). Only peer certificates
          signed by one of the authorities in the default openssl
          cert store, this directory or a PEM file specified by a
          CAfile option argument will be accepted if peer verifi-
          cation is enabled.


     Options taking values except -F, -E and -j can not  be  pro-
     vided multiple times.


TIMEOUT INTERVALS
     The  "-t  Timeout",  "-e  Timeout",  "-S  Timeout"   options
     severally and conjunctively control the lifetime of the con-
     nection to the remote desktop server in all its aspects:


     "-t Timeout" controls the maximum delay in opening the  ini-
     tial TCP connection

     "-e Timeout" controls the maximum delay in establishing  the
     RDP session once the TCP connection is open

     "-S Timeout" controls the maximum period of unresponsiveness
     for the TCP connection


     This last option, which configures the TCP keep alive inter-
     val,  is  platform dependent in implementation, and on Linux
     platforms may result in a keep alive  period  in  the  range



Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     7






Sun Ray User Commands                                    uttsc(1)



     (timeout,  timeout  +  10  seconds), depending upon when the
     channel first becomes quiescent. On Solaris  platforms,  the
     range is (timeout, timeout + 1 second).


EXAMPLES
     1. An example to redirect a printer named  "printer1"  which
     uses the hp deskjet 990c driver, to a Windows session on say
     winserver1 :

     % uttsc -u user1 -r printer:printer1="hp deskjet 990c"  win-
     server1


EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found


ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     tab(!)  box;  cw(2.750000i)|  cw(2.750000i)   lw(2.750000i)|
     lw(2.750000i).   Attribute Type ! Attribute Value Availabil-
     ity   ! SUNWuttsc


SEE ALSO
     uttscadm(8), uttscprinteradm(8), utlicenseadm(8)


























Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     8



uninstaller.8



Sun Ray Administration Commands                    uninstaller(8)



NAME
     uninstaller - Removes Sun Ray Connector software.

SYNOPSIS
     uninstaller [-a admin]

DESCRIPTION
     uninstaller removes the Sun Ray Connector 2.4 software  from
     the system.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a admin
           An alternate  admin(5)  file  can  be  specified  with
           admin.  Solaris only option.

FILES
     /opt/SUNWuttsc/etc/admin_default  is the default admin file.

EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |        Attribute Value      |
    | Availability                |  SUNWuttsc                  |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO


















Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     1






uttscadm.8



Sun Ray Administration Commands                       uttscadm(8)



NAME
     uttscadm - Sun Ray Connector for Windows Configuration util-
     ity

SYNOPSIS
     uttscadm  -c -g groupname | -u | -r | -h

DESCRIPTION
     uttscadm is a deprecated utility used to configure  the  Sun
     Ray Connector for Windows.

     Please use /opt/SUNWut/sbin/utconfig  -c  to  configure  the
     same.

     uttscadm must be run with root permissions  after  installa-
     tion to prepare the system to launch the Connector.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -c   This option configures the system to launch the Connec-
          tor.  It  creates the required SRDS schema to store the
          printer configurations. It also prompts  the   adminis-
          trator for the path to the OpenSSL library location, if
          required.  A groupname must be specified during  confi-
          guration using the -g option.

          On Solaris, it also creates the required entries in the
          /etc/services file for the Sun Ray Connector Proxy dae-
          mon, and thereafter launches it.

     -u   This option is used to unconfigure the changes  created
          during configuration, before removing the Connector.

     -g   Specify the groupname to be  assigned  to  the  Windows
          Connector  and  Proxy  daemon binaries. This option can
          only be  used  at  configuration  time.  The  groupname
          should be a valid existing groupname which is used only
          for this purpose, as it  controls  what  processes  can
          connect to the proxy daemon.

     -r   Run uttscadm to update the Windows Connector and  Proxy
          daemon  binary  locations  to  their  runtime locations
          after they have been updated on the system, say after a
          patch  install.   This  option  must not be used if the
          server has not previously been configured using the  -c
          option.

     -h   Displays command usage information






Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     1






Sun Ray Administration Commands                       uttscadm(8)



EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found


ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |        Attribute Value      |
    | Availability                |  SUNWuttsc                  |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     uttsc(1)







































Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     2



uttscprinteradm.8



Sun Ray Administration Commands                uttscprinteradm(8)



NAME
     uttscprinteradm - uttsc printer cache administration tool

SYNOPSIS
     uttscprinteradm -h
     uttscprinteradm -l [username]
     uttscprinteradm -d username [printer]

DESCRIPTION
     The uttscprinteradm command is a utility to administer users
     and  printers  in the uttsc printer configuration cache. The
     cache is used to automatically preserve  printer  configura-
     tion changes done by users to printers provided on the uttsc
     command  line  during  subsequent  connections  to   Windows
     servers through uttsc.

     Separate printer configuration entries are stored for  every
     Windows user/printer combination.

     Configuration entries of the same  printer  using  different
     Windows  drivers  are  not  compatible with each other. If a
     printer is redirected with a new driver none of  the  confi-
     guration saved with the previous driver will be restored. If
     the configuration is changed while the printer is redirected
     with the new driver the new configuration will automatically
     overwrite the old configuration.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -h   Display usage information.

     -l [username]
          List printers of all users if no user specified or list
          printers of the specified user.

     -d username [printer]
          Delete specified printer of the specified user  or  (if
          no  printer  specified) delete user and all printers of
          user.

EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found


ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:







Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     1






Sun Ray Administration Commands                uttscprinteradm(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |        Attribute Value      |
    | Availability                |  SUNWuttsc                  |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     uttsc(1)















































Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     2



uttscrestart.8



Sun Ray Administration Commands                   uttscrestart(8)



NAME
     uttscrestart - Sun Ray Windows Connector  utility  for  res-
     tarting service.

SYNOPSIS
     uttscrestart

DESCRIPTION
     The uttscrestart command is used for restarting the Sun  Ray
     Windows Connector daemon process. Existing Sun Ray Connector
     sessions will not be affected by the restart.

     uttscrestart can only be run by the super-user.

OPTIONS
     There are no options to this command.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: This starts the service if it is not running,  or
     restarts it if it is already running.

     # uttscrestart

EXIT STATUS
     0 if operation performed successfully, 1 if error found


ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |        Attribute Value      |
    | Availability                |  SUNWuttsc                  |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     uttsc(1)
















Sun Ray Connector_2.4 Last change: 04/22/11                     1



Sun Ray Kiosk Man Pages

kioskdesc.1



Kiosk Session Service Commands                       kioskdesc(1)



NAME
     kioskdesc - list or print contents of Kiosk Session  Service
     descriptors and application lists

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskdesc list -a|-A|-s [name]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskdesc print {-a|-A|-s} name

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskdesc help

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskdesc -h

DESCRIPTION
     kioscdesc may be used to list available Kiosk  Session  Ser-
     vice descriptors and application lists.

SUBCOMMANDS
     The following subcommands are supported:

     list  List available Kiosk Session Service  descriptors  and
           application lists or test for the existence of a named
           descriptor or application list.  If no  name  is  pro-
           vided,  a  list  of names is printed, which enumerates
           all available Kiosk  Session  Service  descriptors  or
           application  lists.  If  name  is  provided, kioskdesc
           tests for the existence of  the  named  Kiosk  Session
           Service   descriptor   or  application  list.  If  the
           descriptor or application list exists, the  full  path
           to   the   descriptor  or  application  list  file  is
           printed.

     print Print  the  contents  of  the  Kiosk  Session  Service
           descriptor or application list named name.

     help  Prints a help message.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported:

     -a    The list or print subcommand is applied to Kiosk  Ses-
           sion Service application descriptors.

     -A    The list or print subcommand is applied to Kiosk  Ses-
           sion Service application lists.

     -s    The list or print subcommand is applied to Kiosk  Ses-
           sion Service session descriptors.

     -h    Prints a usage message.





Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service Commands                       kioskdesc(1)



OPERANDS
     The following operands are supported:

     name  The name of a Kiosk Session Service descriptor  to  be
           listed  or whose contents should be printed.  name may
           be a full path to a descriptor or application list  or
           a  well-known name used to search predefined locations
           for descriptors or application lists. For more details
           on  the  use of well-known names to locate descriptors
           and applications lists, see kiosk(8).

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Listing available descriptors

     You may use the list subcommand to list all  available  ses-
     sion descriptors as follows.

     kiosk% kioskdesc list -s
     jds3
     uttsc
     kiosk%

     Similarly, use the list subcommand  to  list  all  available
     application descriptors as follows.

     kiosk% kioskdesc list -a
     browser
     calculator
     charmap
     editor
     imageviewer
     messenger
     sun_webstart
     kiosk%


     Example 2: Testing for the existence of a descriptor

     You may use the list subcommand as follows  to  check  if  a
     given session descriptor exists.

     kiosk% kioskdesc list -s jds3
     /etc/opt/SUNWkio/sessions/jds3.conf
     kiosk%

     Similarly, use the list subcommand as follows to check if  a
     given application descriptor exists.

     kiosk% kioskdesc list -a browser
     /etc/opt/SUNWkio/applications/browser.conf
     kiosk%




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service Commands                       kioskdesc(1)



     Example 3: Printing the contents of a descriptor

     You may use the print subcommand as  follows  to  print  the
     contents of a given session descriptor.

     kiosk% kioskdesc print -s uttsc
     KIOSK_SESSION_ARGS=-t 1800 -- -m -b
     KIOSK_SESSION_DESCRIPTION=A full screen Sun Ray Windows Connector session.
     KIOSK_SESSION_EXEC=/etc/opt/SUNWkio/sessions/uttsc/uttsc
     KIOSK_SESSION_ICON=
     KIOSK_SESSION_LABEL=Sun Ray Connector for Microsoft Windows OS
     kiosk%

     Similarly, use the print subcommand as follows to print  the
     contents of a given application descriptor.

     kiosk% kioskdesc print -a sun_webstart
     KIOSK_APP_DESCRIPTION=Java Web Start
     KIOSK_APP_EXEC=/usr/java/jre/javaws/javaws
     KIOSK_APP_ICON=/usr/java/jre/plugin/desktop/sun_java.png
     KIOSK_APP_LABEL=Java Web Start
     KIOSK_APP_POST=
     KIOSK_APP_PRE=
     KIOSK_APP_PROTOTYPE=
     kiosk%

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned.

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kiosk(8)









Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3



kioskparam.1



Kiosk Session Service Commands                      kioskparam(1)



NAME
     kioskparam - inspect Kiosk session parameters

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskparam [-xkS] [-E env-prefix] [-e  env-
     var[,...]]  [-u user|-d display|-s display|-f file] [pattern
     ...]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskparam -h

DESCRIPTION
     kioskparam is used to evaluate and view effective Kiosk ses-
     sion   configuration   for   a   given   kiosk   session  or
     session.conf(5) file.  The effective  configuration  is  the
     result  of  combining settings from the session.conf(5) file
     and the session descriptor  for  the  session  to  which  it
     points. Parameter substitutions within the configuration are
     resolved as far as possible.   For  a  full  description  of
     Kiosk session configuration see kiosk(8).

     kioskparam can evaluate the effective  configuration  for  a
     currently  active  kiosk  session identified by a kiosk user
     account or X11 display name, configuration statically stored
     for   a   display   using  kioskconfig(8)  or  a  standalone
     session.conf(5) file.

OPTIONS
     The -u, -d, -s and -f options can be used to select the ses-
     sion configuration to evaluate.  At most one of these option
     can be specified. By default kioskparam evaluates configura-
     tion  for  the  kiosk session from which it is called, as if
     invoked with -u $USER.

     -u user
           Evaluates configuration for the currently active  ses-
           sion running under the specified kiosk user account.

     -d display
           Evaluates configuration for the currently active kiosk
           session running on the specified X11 display.

     -s display
           Evaluates  configuration  configured  using  kioskcon-
           fig(8) for the specified X11 display.

     -f file
           Evaluates    configuration    from    the    specified
           session.conf(5) file.

     The following further options are supported:

     -k    Print only the value for  the  selected  configuration



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service Commands                      kioskparam(1)



           key(s). The default is to print key=value pairs.

     -x    Escape or quote the  key=value  output,  so  that  the
           result  can safely be evaluated by a shell as a series
           of shell variable assignments.

     -e env-var
           Import the specified environment  variable  as  a  key
           with  its value into the evaluation process.  Multiple
           environment variables may be specified  by  separating
           their  names  with  commas or by providing this option
           multiple times.

     -E env-prefix
           Enable use of environment variables starting with  the
           specified  prefix  in  expanding parameters as part of
           the evaluation process.  Only a single prefix  can  be
           used.  The  default,  if no prefix is specified expli-
           citly, is to honor all variables starting with KIOSK_.

     -S    Set up and import a standard set of environment  vari-
           ables: USER, DISPLAY and HOME. If configuration for an
           active session is being  evaluated  (-u  or  -d),  the
           values  for  these variables are set to the user name,
           display and associated home directory  for  this  ses-
           sion.  If  -s  is  used,  DISPLAY  is set to match the
           specified display. Other values  are  taken  from  the
           current  environment.  If all the values are available
           or  can  be   inferred,   this   option   implies   -e
           USER,DISPLAY,HOME.

     -q    Quiet mode. Don't print error messages or warnings.

     -h    Show a help message.

OPERANDS
     pattern
           One or more pattern can be  specified  to  select  the
           keys  whose  values  are  to be printed. A pattern may
           either be a plain key name,  which  selects  that  key
           exactly  or a key name prefix followed by * as a wild-
           card to select all keys  starting  with  that  prefix.
           Multiple  patterns  can be specified. If no pattern is
           specified, all keys are selected.

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned.

     0     Success

     1     Failure




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service Commands                      kioskparam(1)



ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kioskconfig(8), kiosk(8), session.conf(5)










































Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3



kioskstatus.1



Kiosk Session Service Commands                     kioskstatus(1)



NAME
     kioskstatus - indicate the  current  Kiosk  Session  Service
     status for a given display or user.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskstatus [-hqx]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskstatus -d [-qx] [display ...]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskstatus -u [-q] [username ...]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskstatus -c [-q]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskstatus -h

DESCRIPTION
     The kioskstatus utility may be used to query  whether  Kiosk
     mode  is  active  in a system session and the overall confi-
     guration status of Kiosk Session Service.

     The first three forms of the  kioskstatus  command  indicate
     whether  or  not  a  given  X11  display  or user account is
     currently running a valid Kiosk session. The fourth form  of
     kioskstatus  indicates whether Kiosk Session Service is con-
     figured, so that kiosk sessions can be started.

     Without any options, kioskstatus will report whether or  not
     the  current  session  (identified  by  the current value of
     $DISPLAY) is a valid Kiosk session. In addition to  checking
     the status for the session allocated to the current display,
     it is also verified that this session is  allocated  to  the
     current user's login name, as reported by logname(1).

     kioskstatus may be used to check sessions on other  displays
     by  specifying the -d option. No user identity check is per-
     formed in this case. If no display is specified, the current
     session  (identified  by  the  current value of $DISPLAY) is
     checked.

     The kiosk status of a session can be determined by  inspect-
     ing  a  marker  property  set  on  the X11 root window or by
     querying the kiosk user account allocation  data  maintained
     by  Kiosk  Session  Services.  By  default session status is
     determined using kiosk user account allocation queries.  The
     -x  option  may  be  used  to  perform  an  X property query
     instead. Generally the  X  property  query  more  accurately
     reflects  the  state  of an active kiosk session, but such a
     query requires authorization to connect to the X server  for
     the  inspected  session  and  may  hang,  if the X server is
     currently grabbed, for example by a display manager  showing
     a login greeter.




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service Commands                     kioskstatus(1)



     Alternatively, kioskstatus can determine  whether  specified
     user accounts are currently assigned to an active kiosk ses-
     sion by specifying the -u option. If no username  is  speci-
     fied,  the current user's login name, as reported by getlog-
     name(1), is checked.

     kioskstatus may also be used to check whether Kiosk  Session
     Service  configuration  is  complete, so that kiosk sessions
     can be started.  It is checked that kiosk user accounts  are
     configured.  You can configure kiosk user accounts using the
     kioskuseradm(8) tool.

     The last form of kioskstatus displays a short help message.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -c    Query whether Kiosk Session Service is configured.

     -d    Query kiosk status for the specified displays  or  for
           the current X display.

     -u    Query kiosk status for the specified user accounts  or
           for the current user.

     -x    Read the kiosk  status  from  the  X  server  for  the
           display(s). This option requires authorization to con-
           nect to the X server for the  session.  The  X  server
           access may hang, if the X server is grabbed.

     -q    Quiet mode. Indicates that the status  should  not  be
           printed to standard output. This option is most useful
           for scripting.

     -h    Displays a short help message.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Querying users' Kiosk status

     Given a Kiosk user, ku1000, who is currently running a Kiosk
     session, a Kiosk user ku1001, who is not currently running a
     Kiosk  session  and  a  non  Kiosk  user   user1002,   using
     kioskstatus to query their status will produce the following
     output.

     kiosk% kioskstatus -u ku1000 ku1001 user1002
     ku1000: active
     ku1001: not active
     user1002: not a kiosk account
     kiosk%

     Example 2: Querying a display's Kiosk status



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service Commands                     kioskstatus(1)



     Given a display, :2, which is currently running a Kiosk ses-
     sion  and  a  display,  :3, which is not currently running a
     Kiosk session, using kioskstatus to query their  Kiosk  sta-
     tuses will produce the following output.

     kiosk% kioskstatus -d :2 :3
     :2: active
     :3: not active
     kiosk%

     Assuming the current user has  access  to  both  X  servers,
     using  kioskstatus  to  query  the X servers for their Kiosk
     status will produce the following output.

     kiosk% kioskstatus -dx :2 :3
     :2: running
     :3: disabled
     kiosk%

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     If the -c option is used, an exit status  of  0  indi-
           cates that Kiosk Session Service is configured. Other-
           wise an exit status of 0 indicates that a  Kiosk  ses-
           sion  is  active  for  all specified displays or user-
           names.

     1     If the -c option is used, an exit status  of  1  indi-
           cates  that  the  Kiosk Session Service is not config-
           ured. Otherwise an exit status  of  1  indicates  that
           there  is  no active Kiosk session for at least one of
           the specified displays or usernames.

     2     An exit status of 2  indicates  that  determining  the
           status of Kiosk Session Service configuration or of at
           least one  of  the  specified  displays  or  usernames
           failed due to an error.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3






Kiosk Session Service Commands                     kioskstatus(1)



     kiosk(8)






















































Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          4



session.conf.5



Kiosk Session Service File Formats                session.conf(5)



NAME
     session.conf -  Kiosk Session Service session  configuration
     file.

SYNOPSIS
     /etc/opt/SUNWkio/session.conf

DESCRIPTION
     session.conf is the default  configuration  input  file  for
     kioskconfig(8).  The contents of session.conf indicate, at a
     minimum, which  Kiosk  session  should  be  used  for  Kiosk
     enabled displays. Other Kiosk session properties configuring
     resource limitations, session arguments  etc.  may  also  be
     specified  in  session.conf. Kiosk session properties speci-
     fied in session.conf override properties set in the  associ-
     ated Kiosk session descriptor.

     The format of session.conf is similar to a restricted bourne
     shell  file.  The  file contains a list of KEY=VALUE assign-
     ments. Values may contain variable references  in  the  form
     $VARIABLE  or  ${VARIABLE}.  Such  variable  references  are
     expanded by substituting a value from a previous  assignment
     to   VARIABLE  or  from  one  of  the  predefined  variables
     enumerated below. Nested or  repeated  substitution  is  not
     supported.  A  literal dollar sign ('$') in the value may be
     obtained by preceding it with a backslash ('\').  A  literal
     backslash   may  be  escaped  with  an  extra  backslash.  A
     backslash that is followed neither by a backslash nor  by  a
     dollar sign has no special meaning. If the VALUE part of the
     assignment is surrounded by quotes ("..."  or  '...'),  such
     quotes  are removed to determine the value. Quote removal is
     not applied, if the  quote  character  reoccurs  inside  the
     VALUE.  Quoting  has  no effect on expansion of variables or
     backslash escaping.

     Kiosk session properties are defined by assigning values  to
     variables.  The following is a list of the environment vari-
     ables which may be used to configure  your  preferred  Kiosk
     session.  With  the exception of KIOSK_SESSION, all environ-
     ment variables are optional.  Unless  otherwise  stated,  no
     default values are applied.

     KIOSK_ENABLED
           Indicates whether or  not  Kiosk  should  be  enabled.
           Valid  values  are  yes or no indicating that Kiosk is
           enabled or disabled respectively. The default value is
           no.

     KIOSK_SESSION
           Identifies which Kiosk session should  be  used.   You
           may  specify either the well-known name of or absolute
           path to a Kiosk  Session  Descriptor  here.  For  more



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service File Formats                session.conf(5)



           details  on  Kiosk  Session Descriptors and the use of
           well-known names to locate them, see kiosk(8).

     KIOSK_SESSION_APPLAUNCHER
           Identifies  the  absolute  path  to  a  Kiosk  session
           specific  executable used to launch applications added
           to the session.

     KIOSK_SESSION_APPLIST
           Identifies a Kiosk  Session  Application  List  to  be
           used.   You  may specify either the well-known name of
           or absolute path to a Kiosk session application  list.
           For  more  details  on Kiosk Session Application Lists
           and the use of well-known names to  locate  them,  see
           kiosk(8).

     KIOSK_SESSION_ARGS
           Identifies the command line arguments to be passed  to
           the  Kiosk  session  executable  when  the  session is
           launched.

     KIOSK_SESSION_DIR
           Identifies a directory reserved for use by  the  Kiosk
           session.

     KIOSK_SESSION_ENV
           Specifies a space-separated list of Kiosk session pro-
           perties  which  should be exported into the kiosk ses-
           sion as environment variables.

     KIOSK_SESSION_EXEC
           Identifies the absolute path to the Kiosk session exe-
           cutable.

     KIOSK_SESSION_ICON
           Identifies an icon that can be used to  represent  the
           session in an administration tool.

     KIOSK_SESSION_LABEL
           Identifies a label that can be used to  represent  the
           session in an administration tool.

     KIOSK_SESSION_LOCALE
           Identifies the locale to be used by the Kiosk session.
           The default value is the default system locale.

     KIOSK_SESSION_LIMIT_CPU
           Identifies the maximum cpu usage (in seconds) per pro-
           cess  for  the Kiosk session. The default value is the
           default system limit. For more details, see ulimit(1).

     KIOSK_SESSION_LIMIT_DESCRIPTORS



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service File Formats                session.conf(5)



           Identifies the maximum number of open file descriptors
           per  process  for the Kiosk session. The default value
           is the default system limit.  For  more  details,  see
           ulimit(1).

     KIOSK_SESSION_LIMIT_FILESIZE
           Identifies the maximum file size (512 byte blocks) for
           the  Kiosk  session.  The default value is the default
           system limit. For more details, see ulimit(1).

     KIOSK_SESSION_LIMIT_VMSIZE
           Identifies the maximum swap size (in KB)  per  process
           for  the  Kiosk  session.   The  default  value is the
           default system limit. For more details, see ulimit(1).

     KIOSK_SESSION_POST
           Identifies the absolute path to  an  executable  which
           will  be  executed immediately after the Kiosk session
           executable (KIOSK_SESSION_EXEC) terminates.

     KIOSK_SESSION_PRE
           Identifies the absolute path to  an  executable  which
           will  be executed immediately before the Kiosk session
           executable (KIOSK_SESSION_EXEC) starts.

     KIOSK_SESSION_PROTOTYPE
           Identifies a Kiosk Session Prototype which  should  be
           applied  to  the  Kiosk  user's  home directory before
           launching the Kiosk session.  You may  specify  either
           the  well-known  name  of  or absolute path to a Kiosk
           Session Prototype here. For more details on Kiosk Ses-
           sion  Prototypes  and  the  use of well-known names to
           locate them, see kiosk(8).

     The following is a list of variables that can be  referenced
     inside  the  session  configuration  (see  kiosk(8) for more
     information):

     KIOSK_CONFIG_DIR
           The directory where  kiosk  configuration  is  stored,
           usually /etc/opt/SUNWkio.

     KIOSK_SESSIONS_DIR
           The directory where  kiosk  session  configuration  is
           stored, usually /etc/opt/SUNWkio/sessions.

     KIOSK_APPS_DIR
           The directory where kiosk application configuration is
           stored, usually /etc/opt/SUNWkio/applications.

     KIOSK_PROTOS_DIR
           The  directory  where  kiosk  session  or  application



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3






Kiosk Session Service File Formats                session.conf(5)



           prototypes         are         stored,         usually
           /etc/opt/SUNWkio/prototypes.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Committed                   |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kiosk(8), kioskparam(1), kioskconfig(8), ulimit(1)







































Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          4



kiosk.8



Kiosk Session Service                                    kiosk(8)



NAME
     kiosk -  Kiosk Session Service.

DESCRIPTION
     The Kiosk Session Service provides an  infrastructure  which
     can be used to support unauthenticated access to an applica-
     tion environment in a  controlled  manner.   Unauthenticated
     access is useful in scenarios where users cannot be expected
     to provide authentication credentials ( e.g.  public  kiosks
     etc.  ) and in scenarios where authentication is expected to
     be carried out by an application  other  than  the  standard
     login application e.g. Sun Ray Windows Connector.

  Kiosk Session Service Overview
     The Kiosk Session Service can be described  in  terms  of  a
     number of high level concepts/elements.

  Kiosk Session Service User Pool
     The Kiosk Session Service maintains a pool of user  accounts
     dedicated  specifically  to  the  running of Kiosk sessions.
     These accounts have the following characteristics.

     o     They are locked for normal login.

     o     They belong to a local unix  group  that  has  minimal
           rights on the system.

     o     No two sessions use the same Kiosk user account at the
           same time.  The Kiosk Session Service User Pool may be
           configured using kioskuseradm(8).

  Kiosk Session Service Prototypes
     Kiosk prototypes are directories whose contents  are  copied
     to  Kiosk  users'  home directories. Three specific types of
     prototypes exist. These are:

     o     user prototypes:
           These are prototypes which are copied to Kiosk  users'
           home  directories prior to every invocation of a Kiosk
           session and independent of the specific session to  be
           launched.

     o     session prototypes:
           These are prototypes associated with a specific  Kiosk
           session  which  are copied to Kiosk users' home direc-
           tories prior to invocation of that session.

     o     application prototypes:
           These are prototypes associated with a specific  Kiosk
           application.  When and how these prototypes are copied
           to Kiosk users' home directories is  a  Kiosk  session
           specific matter and will vary from session to session.



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service                                    kiosk(8)



  Kiosk Session Service Sessions and Applications
     Kiosk sessions  consist  of  a  Kiosk  Primary  Session  and
     optional added Kiosk Applications.

     Every Kiosk Primary Session is defined by  a  Kiosk  Session
     Descriptor.   A  Kiosk  Session  Descriptor  defines,  at  a
     minimum, a session executable which will be launched as  the
     user  session.  Kiosk  Session  Descriptors  may also define
     other session specific properties such as a  session  proto-
     type,  pre  and  post  execution scripts and a list of added
     Kiosk Applications.

     Kiosk Application  Descriptors  are  used  to  define  Kiosk
     applications  which may be added to a Kiosk Primary Session.
     Similar to session descriptors, a Kiosk Application Descrip-
     tor  defines,  at a minimum, an application executable which
     will be launched when the associated application is invoked.
     Kiosk Application Descriptors may also define other applica-
     tion specific properties such as  an  application  prototype
     and pre and post execution scripts.

     Not all Kiosk Primary Sessions will support the  ability  to
     add  Kiosk Applications. For example, while it is reasonable
     for a Kiosk JDS session to support  the  ability  to  launch
     additional  Kiosk  Applications,  it may make no sense for a
     Kiosk Full Screen Browser session to have  this  capability.
     Kiosk  Primary  Sessions  which support added Kiosk Applica-
     tions must define an "application  launcher"  identified  by
     the  KIOSK_SESSION_APPLAUNCHER  property  in  the associated
     Kiosk Session Descriptor. This application launcher will  be
     invoked  by  the  Kiosk Session Service while processing the
     list of added applications and is responsible for  launching
     applications in a session specific manner.

     Note: Kiosk Session  and  Application  Descriptors  are  not
     delivered  as part of the Kiosk Session Service but are pro-
     vided independently by Kiosk  Session  authors.  Each  Kiosk
     Session  provided  in  this  way should clearly document its
     operation, configuration etc.

  Kiosk Session Service Configuration
     There are a  number  of  different  types  of  configuration
     relevant to the Kiosk Session Service.

     Kiosk Session Service Framework Configuration
           The Kiosk core libraries and utilities use  the  Kiosk
           Session  Service  Framework  Configuration to identify
           locations of various files and directories needed  for
           correct  operation  of  the Kiosk Session Service. The
           Kiosk  Session  Service  Framework  Configuration   is
           available in /etc/opt/SUNWkio/kioskrc.




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service                                    kiosk(8)



     Kiosk Session Service User Configuration
           Kiosk Session Service User  Account  Configuration  is
           used  to  configure  the  Kiosk  Session  Service user
           account  pool  and  the  Kiosk  Session  Service  user
           accounts  maintained within that pool. This configura-
           tion may be managed using the kioskuseradm(8) utility.

     Kiosk Session Service Policy
           Kiosk Session Service Policy indicates whether or  not
           the Kiosk Session Service should be active for a given
           display. Kiosk Policy is a  subset  of  Kiosk  Session
           Service  Session  Configuration.  For more information
           see kioskconfig(8) and session.conf(5).

     Kiosk Session Service Session Configuration
           Kiosk Session Service Session Configuration is used to
           identify per display Kiosk Session information includ-
           ing  Kiosk  Session  Service  Policy,  Kiosk   Session
           Descriptor, various session properties used to control
           resource limitations etc.  For  more  information  see
           kioskconfig(8) and session.conf(5).

  Kiosk Session Service Application Lists
     The list of applications which should be added  to  a  Kiosk
     session  are  collected  together in a Kiosk Session Service
     Application List File. The location of an  Application  List
     File to be used by a given Kiosk Session is identified using
     the KIOSK_SESSION_APPLIST setting in  the  associated  Kiosk
     Session Service Session Configuration. The format of a Kiosk
     Session Service  Application List  is  a  newline  separated
     list of application entries, each entry having the form

     exec|desc:app-name:start-mode;[arg1,arg2...argn]

     where

     o     exec|desc indicates whether  the  subsequent  app-name
           refers to an executable or an application descriptor.

     o     app-name is an absolute path or a name  indicating  an
           application executable or an application descriptor.

     o     start-mode indicates how the application should/can be
           started. Valid values are:

     o         auto:  the application is started automatically.

     o         critical: the application is started automatically
               and registered as critical.

     o         user: the application may be started by the user.




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3






Kiosk Session Service                                    kiosk(8)



     o     arg1,arg2...argn are the command line arguments to  be
           passed to the application executable.


  Enabling and Configuring Kiosk Session Service
     Enabling Kiosk sessions on your host is a simple three  step
     procedure.

     o     Configure the pam(3PAM) stack for your login  manager.
           See pam_kiosk(5) for details on how to do this.

     o     Configure the Kiosk Session Service user account  pool
           using the kioskuseradm(8) utility.

     o     Configure  your  preferred  Kiosk  session  using  the
           kioskconfig(8) utility.

  Locating Prototypes, Descriptors and Application Lists
     Prototypes, descriptors and applications lists may be  iden-
     tified either by an absolute path or a well-known name. When
     a well-known name is used to identify any of these  objects,
     the Kiosk Session Service will search a number of predefined
     locations when trying to locate the object. The search  path
     used depends on the type of object being searched for and is
     summarised as follows.

     Note: the KIOSK_* environment variables mentioned below  are
     specified and may be configured in the Kiosk Session Service
     Framework Configuration as described above.

     o     prototypes:
           prototypes      are      searched      for       using
           $KIOSK_PROTOS_DIR/

     o     descriptors:
           session   descriptors   are   searched    for    using
           $KIOSK_SESSIONS_DIR/.conf
           application  descriptors  are   searched   for   using
           $KIOSK_APPS_DIR/.conf

     o     application lists:
           application   lists    are    searched    for    using
           $KIOSK_APPS_DIR/.list

ISSUES
  gdm(1) and the gdm greeter
     The gdm login manager will  invoke  its  configured  greeter
     regardless  of whether or not authentication credentials are
     needed. In the case of a Kiosk session, a greeter is neither
     needed  nor  desired.  In  some  instances,  the greeter may
     become temporarily  visible  during  the  initialisation  of
     Kiosk  sessions.  As  a  workaround for this, an alternative



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          4






Kiosk Session Service                                    kiosk(8)



     greeter, /opt/SUNWkio/lib/gdm/kioskgreeter is supplied  with
     the  Kiosk Session Service. kioskgreeter depends on non pub-
     lic interfaces of gdm and, as such, is supplied  unsupported
     and  initially  unconfigured.  To configure kioskgreeter you
     should   edit   your   gdm   configuration   file,   usually
     /etc/X11/gdm/gdm.conf, modifying the Greeter setting as fol-
     lows.

     Greeter=/opt/SUNWkio/lib/gdm/kioskgreeter 

     where    is  the  previous  value  of  the
     Greeter setting, if available.
     You must restart gdm after this modification.

  Kiosk sessions and screen lock applications
     Some environments support a screen lock function which locks
     the session after a period of inactivity or under other cir-
     cumstances.  Access to such a locked session is only granted
     when  the user has reauthenticated, typically by providing a
     password.  Kiosk user accounts have no password set and  are
     locked for ordinary login.  Because of this Kiosk users will
     not be able to unlock their session, if  a  screen  lock  is
     activated.

     Session authors are encouraged to make sure their Kiosk ses-
     sions  have  screen  lock functionality disabled. If this is
     not possible, and if the screen lock  program  supports  the
     pam(3PAM)  authentication  framework,  you can guard against
     this lockout scenario by adding the pam_kiosk(8)  module  to
     the  PAM  stack  for  the screen lock program in pam.conf(5)
     with the reentry option.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(5) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes.

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio, SUNWkior           |
    | Interface Stability         | Committed                   |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kioskdesc(1),        kioskstatus(1),         kioskconfig(8),
     kioskuseradm(8),      kioskrestart(8),      session.conf(5),
     pam_kiosk(8)








Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          5



kioskconfig.8



Kiosk Session Service Administration               kioskconfig(8)



NAME
     kioskconfig - generate Kiosk session configuration

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig enable [-d display|-f  display-
     file] [-c config-file]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig apply [-d  display|-f  display-
     file] [-c config-file]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig    disable    [-d    display|-f
     display-file|-a]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig print [-d  display|-f  display-
     file|-a]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig list

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig reset

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig help

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskconfig -h

DESCRIPTION
     kioskconfig is used to generate or show Kiosk session confi-
     guration  for a given display or set of displays. Kiosk ses-
     sion configuration describes the desired user environment of
     Kiosk sessions. This description defines Kiosk policy (indi-
     cating if Kiosk mode is enabled or disabled) and  identifies
     the actual Kiosk session to be used along with settings used
     to configure Kiosk sessions.   For  a  full  description  of
     Kiosk session configuration see kiosk(8).

     kioskconfig can perform its operations either  on  a  single
     display,  specified  by  the -d option, on a set of displays
     listed in a display-file specified by the -f  option  or  on
     all displays for which kiosk configuration currently exists.
     For operations that can operate on selected displays, opera-
     tion  on  all  currently enabled displays is requested using
     the -a option. If no display selection option  is  provided,
     the default display file /etc/opt/SUNWkio/displays is used.

     For the operations that can enable Kiosk mode for a display,
     a  kiosk  session configuration file must be provided. If no
     config-file is specified by  the  -c   option,  the  default
     location  /etc/opt/SUNWkio/session.conf is used. For details
     on the form  and  content  of  the  configuration  file  see
     session.conf(5).

     The Kiosk Session Service does not provide standard  display
     or  session configuration files in the default locations. If



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service Administration               kioskconfig(8)



     you wish to use one of these files,  you  must  create  them
     yourself.

     Configuration changes apply  the  next  time  a  session  is
     started  on  a  configured  display.  If  kiosk sessions are
     already running  on  the  affected  displays,  you  can  use
     kioskrestart(8) to force a restart of the sessions.

SUBCOMMANDS
     The following subcommands are supported.

     enable
           Enable  and  configure  Kiosk  mode  on  one  or  more
           displays.  Kiosk  session configuration is created for
           the specified display(s), based on the specified  con-
           figuration file. The enable command will always enable
           kiosk on the specified display(s). If  the  configura-
           tion  file specifies Kiosk policy itself (i.e. it con-
           tains the KIOSK_ENABLED setting), this policy  setting
           is ignored.

     apply Apply Kiosk session  configuration  which  includes  a
           policy  setting to one or more displays. The specified
           configuration file should  contain  the  KIOSK_ENABLED
           setting to indicate whether kiosk should be enabled or
           disabled on the specified display(s).  If  the  confi-
           guration file does not contain a policy setting, kiosk
           will be disabled on the specified display(s).

     disable
           Disable Kiosk mode for the specified display(s).

     print Print the current Kiosk session configuration for  the
           specified display(s).

     list  List the displays on which  kiosk  mode  is  currently
           enabled.

     reset Remove all current kiosk session  configuration.  Exe-
           cuting  the  reset  command disables Kiosk mode on all
           displays and removes internal  data  structures.  This
           command  should only be used to deconfigure Kiosk mode
           completely, for example after deconfiguring all  kiosk
           user accounts.

     help  Show a help message.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.

     -a    Operate on all currently configured displays.




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service Administration               kioskconfig(8)



     -d display
           Identifies a single display to be configured.

     -f display-file
           Identifies a file which lists the displays to be  con-
           figured.  This file must contain a list of X11 display
           identifiers, one per line. Comment lines starting with
           '#'  are  supported.  If  neither the -d nor -f nor -a
           options are specified, a display file from  a  default
           location  is used. The location of the default display
           file is /etc/opt/SUNWkio/displays. The  Kiosk  Session
           Service  does  not  provide a default display file. If
           you wish to use one, you must provide it yourself.

     -c config-file
           Identifies a file containing Kiosk  configuration.  If
           the  -c  option is not specified, a default configura-
           tion file location is used. The  default  location  of
           the           configuration           file          is
           /etc/opt/SUNWkio/session.conf. The Kiosk Session  Ser-
           vice does not provide a default configuration file. If
           you wish to use one, you must provide it yourself.

     -h    Show a usage message.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Enabling a set of displays using the default con-
     figuration file

     Given a default display file, /etc/opt/SUNWkio/displays con-
     taining the following:

     :1
     :2
     :3
     :4

     and       a        default        configuration        file,
     /etc/opt/SUNWkio/session.conf containing the following:

     KIOSK_ENABLED=no
     KIOSK_SESSION=gnome
     KIOSK_SESSION_PROTOTYPE=/export/home/prototypes/gnome

     the command

     kiosk# kioskconfig enable

     will enable Kiosk sessions for displays :1, :2, :3  and  :4.
     Kiosk  sessions  on  these displays will use the gnome Kiosk
     Session  Descriptor  and  the  /export/home/prototypes/gnome
     prototype  directory.  The  KIOSK_ENABLED  setting  will  be



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3






Kiosk Session Service Administration               kioskconfig(8)



     ignored.

     Example 2: Applying configuration to single display

     Using the configuration file shown above, the command

     kiosk# kioskconfig apply -d :2

     will  apply   all   Kiosk   configuration,   including   the
     KIOSK_ENABLED  setting,  in  the  default configuration file
     /etc/opt/SUNWkio/session.conf to the :2 display.  This  will
     effectively  disable Kiosk sessions for the :2 display. This
     could also be achieved using the command

     kiosk# kioskconfig disable -d :2


     Example 3: Listing displays for which Kiosk Mode is enabled

     After executing the commands from the previous examples, you
     can  list  the  displays on which kiosk is now enabled using
     the command

     kiosk% kioskconfig list
     :1
     :3
     :4


EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned.

     0     Success

     1     Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kioskparam(1), kiosk(8), session.conf(5)






Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          4



kioskrestart.8



Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskrestart(8)



NAME
     kioskrestart - terminate kiosk sessions to restart them in a
     clean state

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskrestart

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskrestart -a

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskrestart -d display ...

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskrestart -u username ...

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskrestart -h

DESCRIPTION
     The kioskrestart utility may be used  to  terminate  running
     kiosk  sessions. This usually causes the sessions to be res-
     tarted from scratch. Restarting a kiosk session can be  used
     to  let  changes  to  kiosk  configuration take effect or to
     reset sessions to a known, clean state.

     Sessions are restarted by simulating termination of a criti-
     cal  application.  This works only for sessions in the "run-
     ning" state, as reported by kioskstatus  -x.  In  particular
     this  command  may report errors, if any affected kiosk ses-
     sions are currently starting or terminating on their own.

     The kioskrestart command can be used to restart the  session
     within  which  it  is  invoked or one or more specified ses-
     sions. To restart specified sessions one of the -a, -d or -u
     options  must be specified. Only one of these options can be
     specified. Root privileges are required to restart  specific
     sessions.

     The first form of  the  kioskrestart  command,  without  any
     options,  is used to restart the current kiosk session. This
     form can be used only within a kiosk session.

     The second form of the kioskrestart  command,  with  the  -a
     option,  is used to restart all currently running kiosk ses-
     sions.

     The third form of the  kioskrestart  command,  with  the  -d
     option, is used to restart the kiosk sessions on one or more
     specified displays.

     The fourth form of the kioskrestart  command,  with  the  -u
     option,  is used to restart the kiosk sessions running under
     one or more specified kiosk user accounts.





Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskrestart(8)



     The last form of  the  kioskrestart  command,  with  the  -h
     option, displays a usage message.

OPTIONS
     The following options are supported.  The   -a,  -d  and  -u
     options   are   mutually   exclusive.  Without  any  option,
     kioskrestart terminates the current kiosk session.

     -a    Terminate all currently active kiosk sessions.

     -d    Terminate  the  kiosk  sessions  for   the   specified
           displays.

     -u    Terminate the kiosk sessions for  the  specified  user
           accounts.

     -h    Displays a help message.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Terminating all kiosk sessions.

     To terminate all kiosk sessions, for example after disabling
     kiosk  mode  on  all  displays, use the kioskrestart command
     with the -a option:

     kiosk# kioskrestart -a
     kiosk#

     Example 2: Terminating a specific kiosk session.

     To terminate a kiosk session  on  a  specific  display,  for
     example after changing kiosk configuration for this display,
     use the kioskrestart command with the -d option:

     kiosk# kioskrestart -d :4
     kiosk#

     Example 3: Terminating a kiosk session for a  specific  user
     account.

     To terminate a kiosk session running under a specific  kiosk
     user  account,  use  the  kioskrestart  command  with the -u
     option:

     kiosk# kioskrestart -u ku13
     kiosk#


EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned:

     0     All specified sessions were terminated successfully.



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskrestart(8)



     non-zero
           Terminating at least one specified session failed.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kiosk(8), kioskconfig(8), kioskuseradm(8)







































Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3



kioskuseradm.8



Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskuseradm(8)



NAME
     kioskuseradm - Kiosk  Session  Service  user  administration
     tool

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm show [-p]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm create [-q] -l prefix -g group
     [-i gid] -u first-uid -c count

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm modify [-fq] [-l  prefix]  [-g
     group [-i gid]] [-u first-uid] [-c count]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm extend [-q] -c count

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm delete [-fq]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm leakcheck [-p]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm cleanup [-q]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm status [-pv]

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm help

     /opt/SUNWkio/bin/kioskuseradm -h

DESCRIPTION
     The Kiosk Session Service maintains a pool of user  accounts
     dedicated  to  running  Kiosk  sessions. kioskuseradm may be
     used to administer this pool of accounts.

SUBCOMMANDS
     The following subcommands are supported.

     show  Print the current Kiosk  User  account  configuration.
           With  the  -p  option  the  output  has the form of an
           option line that can be passed to the create or modify
           commands to restore the same configuration.

     create
           Create count Kiosk user accounts in the  group  group.
           Consecutive  uids  starting  at first-uid will be used
           for the  accounts.  The  user  name  for  the  created
           accounts  will take the form prefixnumber where number
           runs from 0 to count-1.

           If the -i option is not provided, the group group must
           exist  on  the  system.   If  -i is specified, a group
           named group is created with the group-id gid. A  group
           of that name must not exist on the system.




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskuseradm(8)



           The create command will fail, if a Kiosk user  account
           configuration already exists.

     modify
           Modify an existing Kiosk user  account  configuration.
           The  existing  configuration  is deleted and recreated
           with the new settings. Settings that are not specified
           in  the  invocation of this command are kept unchanged
           from the old configuration. Otherwise  the  effect  of
           this command is the same as running the delete command
           followed by the create command.

           The modify command will fail, if Kiosk  user  accounts
           are  not  yet  configured. If there are existing Kiosk
           sessions, the modify command will fail unless  the  -f
           option is specified.

     extend
           Extend the current range of  Kiosk  user  accounts  by
           count additional accounts.

           The extend command can  be  used  to  add  more  Kiosk
           accounts even while there are existing Kiosk sessions.

     delete
           Delete the existing Kiosk user accounts.

           If the group used for  the  Kiosk  user  accounts  was
           created  by  kioskuseradm  by  specifying  the  -i gid
           option to the create or modify command, the group will
           also  be  deleted.  Otherwise  the  group  will not be
           deleted.

           If there are existing Kiosk sessions, the delete  com-
           mand  will  fail unless the -f option is specified. If
           the -f option is  provided  the  delete  command  will
           attempt  to  terminate  existing Kiosk sessions before
           deleting the Kiosk user account.

           If deleting one or more user accounts fails,  you  can
           use   the  leakcheck  command  to  find  any  leftover
           accounts and  the  cleanup  command  to  delete  these
           accounts  once  the circumstances that prevented their
           deletion are resolved.

     leakcheck
           Search for Kiosk user accounts left over from a  prior
           configuration.   Use the cleanup command to delete any
           accounts found once the circumstances  that  prevented
           their  deletion  are resolved. With the -p option, the
           output of the command is a list of user account names,
           one per line.



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskuseradm(8)



     cleanup
           Force the removal of "orphaned" Kiosk accounts,  which
           could  not  be  removed when a prior configuration was
           deleted or modified. Use the leakcheck command to find
           such accounts.

     status
           Print the number  of  configured  and  currently  used
           Kiosk  user  accounts.  With the -p option, the output
           of the command is a pair of numbers

           total-count used-count

           With the -v option, the command also lists  all  Kiosk
           user  accounts  currently  in use and the session (the
           X11 display) to which they are allocated.   With  both
           the  -p and -v options, the output of the command is a
           list of the used user account names and their  associ-
           ated displays, one account per line.

     help  Prints a help message.

OPTIONS
     -l prefix
           Specify the prefix for all Kiosk user  account  names.
           The  prefix must start with a letter which can be fol-
           lowed by up to three more letters or digits.

     -g group
           Specify the name of the group  which  all  Kiosk  user
           accounts  will  belong to. Any valid group name may be
           specified. If the -i gid  option  is  also  specified,
           this group will be created with the given gid. In that
           case the group will also be  deleted  when  the  Kiosk
           user  account  configuration is deleted. Otherwise the
           group must exist on the system and will not be deleted
           with the Kiosk accounts.

     -i gid
           Specify the group-id of  the  group  which  all  Kiosk
           users  account  will  belong  to.  The group specified
           using the -g group option will be created  using  this
           group-id. Any valid unused group id can be specified.

           The special value "auto" can be specified as the  gid.
           In  that  case  selection of a group id is left to the
           groupadd(8) tool.

     -u first-uid
           Specify the starting user-id to be used for the  Kiosk
           user  account  pool. A number greater than 100 must be
           specified. All uids in the range first-uid ...  first-



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3






Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskuseradm(8)



           uid+count-1 must be available for Kiosk account confi-
           guration to succeed.

     -c count
           Specify the number  of  new  Kiosk  user  accounts  to
           create.  When  using  the  create  or modify commands,
           count indicates the the total  number  of  Kiosk  user
           accounts  requested.  When  using  the extend command,
           count indicates the number of new Kiosk user  accounts
           that  should  be  added to the user account pool.  You
           may specify any positive number of up to 4 digits.

     -f    Force termination of existing  session  when  deleting
           user accounts.

     -p    Produce parseable instead of human readable output.

     -q    Quiet Mode. Suppress extensive progress messages.

     -v    Verbose mode. Provide more detail in output.

     -h    Print a usage message.

EXAMPLES
     Example 1: Initial configuration of Kiosk user pool

     The command

     kiosk# kioskuseradm create -l ku -g kiosk -u 1000 -c 10

     will create 10 Kiosk user accounts, starting with uid  1000.
     The  accounts will be named, ku0, ku1, ku2 etc. The accounts
     will belong to the preexisting group named kiosk.

     Example 2: Displaying the current configuration of the Kiosk
     user account pool

     Assuming the Kiosk user account pool has been created  using
     the  command  shown in Example 1, the pool configuration may
     be displayed as follows

     kiosk# kioskuseradm show
     Current kiosk user account settings:
       user name prefix:   ku
       first account uid:  1000
       number of accounts: 10
       kiosk group name:   kiosk
     kiosk# kioskuseradm show -p
     -l ku -g kiosk -u 1000 -c 10

     Example 3: Extending the Kiosk user account pool




Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          4






Kiosk Session Service Administration              kioskuseradm(8)



     Assuming the Kiosk user account pool has been created  using
     the  command shown in Example 1, the pool could be increased
     in size to allow for 20 Kiosk users using the command

     kiosk# kioskuseradm extend -c 10

     Example 4: Removing the Kiosk user pool

     If you no longer need to run Kiosk sessions, you may  delete
     all accounts in the Kiosk user pool using the command

     kiosk# kioskuseradm delete

EXIT STATUS
     The following exit values are returned.

     0     Success

     non zero
           Failure

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes:

     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Uncommitted                 |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kiosk(8)





















Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          5



pam_kiosk.8



Kiosk Session Service                                pam_kiosk(8)



NAME
     pam_kiosk -  Kiosk Session Service pam module.

SYNOPSIS
     /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so
     /opt/SUNWkio/lib64/pam_kiosk.so

DESCRIPTION
     pam_kiosk is the Kiosk Session Service pam  module  used  to
     bypass   normal   authentication  for  Kiosk  sessions.  The
     pam_kiosk module is invoked by the  display  manager  during
     session startup.

     pam_kiosk provides the following functions.

     1. [all modules] Return PAM_IGNORE and  perform  no  further
        action,  if  the  session is known not to be a Kiosk ses-
        sion.

     2. [auth module] Evaluates Kiosk policy to find out if Kiosk
        is enabled.

     3. [auth  module]  If  a  user  identity  was  already  set,
        pam_kiosk  can  clobber it and try to establish the Kiosk
        user anyway or ignore the Kiosk  policy  and  proceed  to
        login that user. The default behaviour is to ignore Kiosk
        policy, which can be changed by  setting  the  ignoreuser
        option.

     4. [auth module] Identifies the user account to use for  the
        session  and  establishes  the user identity for the ses-
        sion.

     5. [auth     module]      Returns      PAM_SUCCESS      from
        pam_sm_authenticate(3PAM)  to  login  the account without
        requiring any actual credentials.

     6. [auth module] In pam_sm_setcred(3PAM) the  X  session  is
        marked  as  a  Kiosk session. Returns PAM_IGNORE to allow
        normal credential setting (pam_unix_cred(8)) to proceed.

     7. [account module] Returns PAM_SUCCESS, if this is a  Kiosk
        session,  to short-circuit account checking, as the Kiosk
        user accounts should be locked.

     8. [session module] Creates/Resets  the  user  account  home
        directory at session start.

     9. [session module] Cleans up the user  account  at  session
        end.





Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          1






Kiosk Session Service                                pam_kiosk(8)



OPTIONS
     pam_kiosk supports the following options.

     debug Send debug messages to  syslog  using  the  auth.debug
           mode (see syslog.conf(5)). This option can be provided
           multiple times to increase the amount of debug  output
           generated.

     nowarn
           Don't output non-fatal warning or error messages.

     ignoreuser
           Ignore (clobber) an existing  PAM_USER  item.  Default
           behavior is to override the Kiosk policy and fall back
           to an authenticated session.

     log=facility
           Use facility for logging events  to  the  system  log.
           Supported  values  for  facility  are  AUTH,  USER and
           LOCAL0-7,

     reentry
           Check if the  current  X  display  and  PAM_USER  user
           account belong to an active kiosk session. If they do,
           pam_sm_authenticate(3PAM) returns  success.  Use  this
           option  only  in the authentication stack for a screen
           lock program, to allow  kiosk  sessions  for  which  a
           screen lock has been activated to unlock.  This option
           has an effect only on the authentication module.

USAGE
     To use the pam_kiosk module you must correctly configure the
     pam stack for your login manager as follows

  Configuring the pam stack on Linux
     There are separate versions of pam_kiosk.so for  32-bit  and
     64-bit  processor architectures. The architecture of the PAM
     client being configured determines which architecture  needs
     to be configured.

     On 32-bit systems:
           Use /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so for all services.

     On 64-bit systems:
           Use /opt/SUNWkio/lib64/pam_kiosk.so  for  system  ser-
           vices.

           Use /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so for 32-bit-only ser-
           vices.

     Only gdm(1) is supported on Linux. To configure gdm you must
     modify  the  gdm  pam  configuration  file /etc/pam.d/gdm as



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          2






Kiosk Session Service                                pam_kiosk(8)



     follows.  This description  is  for  a  32-bit  system.  Use
     /opt/SUNWkio/lib64/pam_kiosk.so          instead          of
     /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so on systems with a 64-bit  ver-
     sion of gdm.

     o     Insert the line

           auth sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so

           On a 64-bit system use:

           auth sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib64/pam_kiosk.so

           This line must be before any line  that  features  the
           usual system authentication, for example pam_unix.

     o     Insert the line

           account sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so

           This line must be first in the account stack for gdm.

     o     Insert the line

           session required /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so

           This line must be first in the session stack for gdm.

     The following is an example of the resulting pam  stack  for
     gdm on a 32-bit system:

     auth     sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so
     auth     required   pam_unix2.so   nullok #set_secrpc
     account  sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so
     account  required   pam_unix2.so
     password required   pam_unix2.so   #strict=false
     session  required   /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so
     session  required   pam_unix2.so   debug # trace or none
     session  required   pam_devperm.so
     session  optional   pam_console.so

  Prevent fallback to an ordinary session
     The pam_kiosk module can be specified multiple times in  the
     same  PAM stack. In this case only the first invocation will
     perform the full function of the module. Subsequent  invoca-
     tions  will  detect  that the function has already been per-
     formed and will simply  return  an  approriate  result  code
     reflecting the success, ignore or error state of the primary
     invocation (see section ERRORS). This can be used to prevent
     PAM  processing  to continue when kiosk setup has failed due
     to an error, by specifying pam_kiosk twice  as  follows  (in
     pam.conf(5) syntax):



Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          3






Kiosk Session Service                                pam_kiosk(8)



       service auth sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so
       service auth requisite  /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so
       ...

  Configuring for screen lock programs
     Kiosk user accounts have no password set and are locked  for
     ordinary  login.   Because  of  this Kiosk users will not be
     able to unlock their session, if a screen lock is activated.
     To guard against this lockout  scenario,  you  can  use  the
     pam_kiosk module with the reentry option, so that the screen
     lock program will instantly unlock without user  action,  if
     pam_kiosk  detects  a  kiosk  session.  To  do  this specify
     pam_kiosk at the very top of the PAM stacks for screen  lock
     services as follows:

       lock-service auth sufficient /opt/SUNWkio/lib/pam_kiosk.so reentry
       ...

ERRORS
     All modules return the following error codes:

     PAM_SUCCESS
           if the current session is  a  kiosk  session  and  the
           module has performed its function successfully.

     PAM_IGNORE
           if the current session is not a kiosk session.

     PAM error codes
           if determining the kiosk policy has failed or if Kiosk
           Mode  is  enabled  for the session, but setting up the
           kiosk session failed.

           Some reasons for failure are

           o  There are no kiosk user accounts available.

           o  The kiosk session configuration is invalid.

           o  Eliminating remnants of a prior kiosk session using
              the same account has failed.

           o  Setting up the environment for  the  kiosk  session
              has failed.

ATTRIBUTES
     See attributes(8) for descriptions of the  following  attri-
     butes.







Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          4






Kiosk Session Service                                pam_kiosk(8)



     ____________________________________________________________
    |       Attribute Type        |       Attribute Value       |
    | Availability                | SUNWkio                     |
    | Interface Stability         | Committed                   |
    |_____________________________|_____________________________|


SEE ALSO
     kiosk(8), pam(3PAM), syslog.conf(5)














































Kiosk 4.3                 Last change:                          5